MANUAL

Compact Vector Drive

EVO 6800 Series
 Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1│SAFETY 7

1.1 GENERAL SAFETY 7

1.1.1 Usage 7
1.1.2 Receiving 7
1.1.3 Installation 7
1.1.4 Wiring 8
1.1.5 Operation 8
1.1.6 Maintenance 9
1.2 WARNING LABEL 10
1.3 AC DRIVE APPLICATION PRECAUTIONS 10
1.3.1 AC Drive Selection 10
1.3.2 Settings 11
1.3.3 General Handling 11
1.4 WARRANTY 12
1.4.1 Warranty Period 12
1.4.2 Warranty Restrictions 12

CHAPTER 2│PRODUCT 13

2.1 COMPONENT NAMES 13

2.1.1 Installation in an IP20 Enclosure 13
2.1.2 NEMA Type 1 Enclosure 14
2.2 RECEIVING CHECKLIST 15
2.3 NAMEPLATE 15
2.4 MODEL NUMBER DEFINITION 16
2.5 POWER RATINGS 16
2.6 COMMON SPECIFICATIONS 17
2.7 PRODUCT DIMENSIONS 19

CHAPTER 3│DRIVE INSTALLATION 24

3.1 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT 24

3.2 INSTALLATION DIRECTION AND SPACING 25
3.2.1 Installation Direction 25
3.2.2 Installation Spacing 25
3.3 KEYPAD AND TERMINAL COVER INSTALLATION 27
27
3.4 WIRING PROTECTION 28
3.4.1 Drive and Input Cable Protection for Short-Circuit Situations 28
 3.4.2 Motors and Output Cable Protection for Short-Circuit Situations 28
3.4.3 Keypad Mounted on Panel Door 28
3.5 KEYPAD REMOTE USAGE 29
3.5.1 REMOTE OPERATION 29
3.5.2 External/Face-Mount 31

CHAPTER 4│WIRING 34

4.1 WIRING SAFETY 34

4.2 MAIN CIRCUIT 35
4.2.1 Main Circuit Terminal 36
4.2.2 Main Circuit Wiring 37
4.2.3 Main Circuit Cable Size and Tightening Torque 40
4.3 CONTROL CIRCUIT 41
4.3.1 Control Circuit Terminals 42
4.3.2 Control Circuit Cable Size and Tightening Torque 49
4.3.3 Ferrule-Type Terminals 50
4.4 I/O CONNECTIONS 51
4.4.1 NPN and PNP Mode Selection 51
4.4.2 Terminal A2 Voltage/Current Input Selection 52
4.4.3 Terminal AM Voltage/Current Output Selection 53
4.4.4 RS-485 Communication Termination ON / OFF Switch 54
4.5 CONNECTION TO PC 54
4.6 WIRING CHECKLIST 55

CHAPTER 5│KEYPAD 56

5.1 KEYPAD 56
5.1.1 Keys and Displays 56
5.1.2 Keypad Display 59
5.1.3 Keypad Programming 61

CHAPTER 6│PARAMETERS 62

6.1 GROUP A, INITIALIZATION 62

A1 INITIALIZATION 62
A2 USER-DEFINED PARAMETERS 66
6.2 GROUP B, APPLICATION 67
B1: OPERATION MODE SELECTION 67
B2 DC BRAKING 78
B3 SPEED SEARCH 79
B4 TIMER FUNCTION 80
 B5 PID CONTROL 81
6.3 GROUP C, TUNING 97
C1 ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION TIME 97
C2 S-CURVE CHARACTERISTICS 101
C3 TORQUE COMPENSATION 102
6.4 GROUP L, FREQUENCY COMMAND 107
L1 Frequency Command 107
L2 FREQUENCY UPPER / LOWER LIMIT 110
L4 UP/ DOWN 1, UP/ DOWN 2 AND FREQUENCY COMMAND HOLD 112
L6 OFFSET FREQUENCY 117
6.5 GROUP D, MOTOR PARAMETERS 119
D1 V/F CHARACTERISTICS 119
D2 MOTOR PARAMETERS 123
6.6 GROUP E, MULTI-FUNCTION TERMINALS 127
E1 MULTI-FUNCTION DIGITAL INPUTS 127
E2 MULTI-FUNCTION DIGITAL OUTPUT 138
E2- 00 TO E2- 02 RELAY 1/ RELAY 2 AND D1/ DC FUNCTION SELECTION 138
E4 Multi-Function Analog Output 157
E5 PULSE TRAIN INPUT/ OUTPUT 159
E6 OPTIONAL COMMUNICATION CARD SETTINGS 164
6.7 GROUP P, PROTECTIONS 166
P1 MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION 166
P2 MOMENTARY POWER LOSS 170
P4 FREQUENCY DETECTION 180
P5 FAULT RESTART 182
P6 OVERTORQUE/ UNDERTORQUE DETECTION 184
P7 DRIVE PROTECTION 188
6.8 GROUP N, SPECIAL ADJUSTMENTS 191
N1 HUNTING PREVENTION 191
6.9 GROUP O, KEYPAD FUNCTION SETTINGS 192
O1 DISPLAY SETTING 192
O2 MULTI-FUNCTION SELECTION 193
O4 MAINTENANCE SETTINGS 196
6.10 GROUP T, AUTO-TUNING 198
T1 IM MOTOR AUTO-TUNING 198

CHAPTER 7│RETAIN 207

CHAPTER 8│TROUBLESHOOTING 207

 8.1 ALARM AND FAULT DISPLAYS 207
8.2 FAULT DETECTION 211
8.3 OPERATION ERRORS 219
8.4 AUTO-TUNING FAULT DETECTION 222

CHAPTER 9│INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE 223

9.1 SAFETY 223

9.2 PERIODIC INSPECTION 224
9.2.1 Environment 224
9.2.2 Voltage 224
9.2.3 Keypad Monitor 224
9.2.4 Enclosure 224
9.2.5 Main Circuit 225
9.2.6 Main Circuit- Terminals & Cables 225
9.2.7 Main Circuit- Capacitors 225
9.2.8 Main Circuit- Resistors 226
9.2.9 Main Circuit- Magnetic Contactors & Relays 226
9.2.10 Control Circuit- Control Boards & Connectors 226
9.2.11 Cooling- Fans 226
9.2.12 Cooling- Air Duct 227
9.3 DRIVE COOLING FANS 227
9.3.1 Cooling Fan Replacement 227

CHAPTER 10│DRIVE DERATING 229

10.1 TEMPERATURE DERATING 229

10.2 ALTITUDE DERATING 230

CHAPTER 11│COMMUNICATIONS 231

11.1 MODBUS COMMUNICATION SPECIFICATIONS 231

11.2 CONNECTING TO CONTROLLER/PLC/HMI 231
11.2.1 Communication Cable Connection 231
11.2.2 Termination Resistor Setting for Multiple Connections 232
11.2.3 Termination Resistor Function 232
11.2.4 When to Install Termination Resistor 232
11.3 MODBUS SETUP PARAMETERS 232
11.4 DRIVE OPERATIONS BY MODBUS 234
11.4.1 Actions by Modbus 234
11.4.2 Drive Control by Modbus 234
11.5 MESSAGE FORMAT 235
 11.5.1 Message Content 235
11.5.2 Message Configuration 235
11.5.3 Slave Station Address 236
11.5.4 Function Code 236
11.5.5 Data 236
11.5.6 Error Check 236
11.5.7 Command Data 236
11.5.8 Response Message 237
11.6 EXAMPLE OF READING / RESPONDING DATA 238
11.7 MODBUS DATA 242
11.8 COMMUNICATION ERRORS 256
11.8.1 Modbus Errors 256
11.8.2 Slave Response 257
11.9 MODBUS COMMUNICATION EXAMPLE 258
Chapter 1│Safety

1.1 General Safety

Safety Information:
Warning: Indicates highly dangerous consequences such as fire, serious injury and death
when failing to comply with the instructions.
Caution: Indicates dangerous consequences such as moderate injury and equipment
damage when failing to comply with the instructions.

1.1.1 Usage
Danger

1. The drive is used to control the speed of 3 phase synchronous and asynchronous
motors, which must not be used for single phase or other purposes. Failure to comply
could cause drive damage or serious injury by fire.
2. The drive must not be used in any medical equipment in which human life may involve.
3. The drive is manufactured according to strict quality control standard. However, bypass
the safety protection in case the drive failure causes death or serious injury.

1.1.2 Receiving
Warning

1. Do not install damaged drive or any drive without complete components inside. Failure
to comply could result in accident.

1.1.3 Installation
Warning

1. Carry the drive by the bottom as carrying by the front cover may cause injury and
damage from the main body of the drive falling.
2. Attach the drive to metal or other nonflammable materials. Keep away from heat and
flammable items.
3. A control panel must have cooling fans, air vents and room for ventilation when the drive
is installed inside.

7
1.1.4 Wiring
Danger

1. Allow only qualified electrical engineers to install the drive. Failure to comply could cause
electrical shocks to personnel or damage to the drive.
2. Ensure the power supply is off when connecting. Failure to comply could cause electrical
shocks.
3. Ensure the ground terminal PE is properly wired. Failure to comply could cause electrical
shocks from the drive cover. Therefore ground the drive and motor for personnel safety.
4. Do not touch the main circuit terminal. Keep the main circuit off drive cover to avoid
electrical shocks.
5. The terminal for braking resistor is B1 and B2. Do not connect it to any other terminals.
Failure to comply could cause a fire.
Warning

1. Do not connect three-phase power supply to terminals U, V and W. Failure to comply

could damage the drive.
2. An output reactor is recommended when the cable connecting between the drive and
motor is over 100 meters. Failure to comply could result in drive damage with
overcurrent caused by over-distributed capacitance.
3. Never connect the output terminals to capacitors or unapproved LC/RC filters. Failure to
comply could damage the drive components.
4. Separate the drive main circuit cables and control circuit cables. Failure to comply could
cause interference to the control signals
5. Ensure the phase of power supply and rated voltage match the label on the drive. Failure
to comply could drive damage.

1.1.5 Operation
Danger

1. Connect the power after completion of wiring and closing the front cover. Opening the
front cover when the power is on could cause electrical shocks.
2. Keep other personnel off the equipment when setting the drive fault restart and
momentary power loss restart functions. Failure to comply could cause damage to the
personnel and equipment.
3. Once the drive is powered, the terminals are live even when drive is not in operation.
Touching the terminals could cause electrical shocks.
8
 4. Cancel run command before resetting the alarm and fault. Failure to comply could cause
physical injury.

Warning

1. Do not start or stop the drive by connecting or disconnecting the power supply. Failure
to comply could cause drive damage.
2. Ensure the motor and equipment are in proper use before operation. Failure to; comply
could damage the equipment.
3. The temperature of the braking resistor and heatsink could be very high during
operation. Do not touch it or it could result in scald.
4. For lift applications, please install mechanical brakes.
5. Adjust a few parameters only if necessary as the defaults are optimum settings for most
of applications. Editing parameters indiscriminately could cause equipment abnormal
operation.
6. Interlock the electricity supply with AC drive supply when both are available to a motor.

1.1.6 Maintenance
Danger

1. Do not touch the main circuit of the drive when power is on. Failure to comply could
cause electrical shocks.
2. Disconnect the power supply before opening the front cover of the drive.
3. Maintain the drive only when the CHARGE indicator light is off or 5 minutes after turning
off power supply, so as to avoid charged capacitors causing physical injury.
4. Allow only qualified electric engineers and electrician to maintain, repair and replace the
AC drive modules.
Warning

1. The release of breaker on the AC drive primary side could be caused by incorrect wiring,
short circuit and damaged drive components. Investigate and remove the problem
before reconnecting the breaker.
2. Do not use a megger (insulation resistor) to test the drive control circuit. Failure to
comply could cause drive damage.

Notice:

All the instruction photographs and diagrams of opened drive in this manual are only for
illustration. Do not attempt to operate any AC drives with the cover opened.

9
1.2 Warning Label
The warning label is on the front of the drive. Please read it carefully and follow the
instructions.

 Read the user manual before operation.

 Risk of electrical shock. Shut off main power and wait for 5 minutes before servicing.

 Hot surface. Risk of burn.

Warning Label

1.3 AC Drive Application Precautions

1.3.1 AC Drive Selection

1.3.1.1 Drive Capacity

Before driving motors, ensure the motor rated current is lower than the drive rated output. In
addition, when a single AC drive is driving more than 1 motor in parallel, make sure the drive
capacity is higher than 110% of total motor rated current.

1.3.1.2 Starting Torque

10
The motor characteristics at start and during acceleration are limited by the drive overcurrent.
If higher starting torque is needed, use a higher rating drive or increase capacity of both motor
and drive.

1.3.1.3 Emergency Stop

When a drive fault occurs, protection function will be automatically triggered to shut off the
output but the motor may not stop immediately. Therefore please install mechanical brake if
immediate stop is necessary.

1.3.2 Settings

1.3.2.1 Upper Limits

The maximum output frequency of the drive is 400Hz. If the upper limit is set incorrectly, the
motor will run at higher than its rated speed and cause danger. Please set the limit of output
frequency in Frequency Upper Limit parameter. The default setting of the rated output
frequency is 60Hz.

1.3.2.2 DC Braking

Excessive DC braking current and duration could cause motor overheat.

1.3.2.3 Acceleration /Deceleration Time (Acc./Dec. Time)

Acceleration and deceleration time is determined by the motor torque, load torque and load
inertia. Set a longer Acc./Dec. time after Stall Prevention function is triggered. In addition, the
acceleration and deceleration time will be extended depending on the Stall Prevention
duration. If faster acceleration and deceleration are required, install proper braking options or
use a higher rating motor and AC drive.

1.3.3 General Handling

1.3.3.1 Wiring

Connecting power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 will damage the drive.
Check all the connections and wiring sequence before turning on the power. Failure to comply
could cause drive damage.

1.3.3.2 Maintenance

11
Capacitors in the drive may still be charged for a short time after shutting off the power. Wait
for the amount of time specified on the drive before any maintenance. Failure to comply could
cause electrical shocks to personnel. Besides, do not touch the heatsink which can be very hot
during operation. Replace the cooling fan only when the heatsink has cooled down after
shutting off the power. In addition, when a synchronous motor is coasting to stop, it
regenerates voltage to keep the drive terminals live even when the drive power is off. Wait
until the motor is fully stopped before drive maintenance. Failure to comply could cause
electrical shocks to personnel.

1.3.3.3 Wiring Tools

Use only the tools suggested by the terminal supplier during drive maintenance.

1.3.3.4 Transportation and installation

Do not explore the drive to the environment containing the halogens or DOP gas during
transportation or installation.

1.4 Warranty

1.4.1 Warranty Period

Contact local distributor for details.

1.4.2 Warranty Restrictions

Warranty is not applicable when the drive is not properly used according to the manual
regardless of warranty period.

12
 Chapter 2│Product

2.1 Component Names

This section illustrates each components of the drive.

2.1.1 Installation in an IP20 Enclosure

A – Heatsink F – Terminal cover screw K –Terminal cover screw

B – Cooling fan G – Front cover L – Keypad
C – Cooling fan guard H – USB port
D – Conduit bracket I –Terminal cover
E – Rubber bushing J – Front cover screw

13
2.1.2 NEMA Type 1 Enclosure

A –Top protective cover F – Rubber bushing K – Front cover screw

B – Heatsink G – Terminal cover screw L –Terminal cover screw
C – Cooling fan H – Front cover M – Keypad
D – Cooling fan guard I – USB port
E – Conduit bracket J –Terminal cover

14
2.2 Receiving Checklist

Check the following when receiving the drive:

1. Is the packaging box in good condition? Any damage or damp ?

If so, contact the distributor or local Lite-On representative.
2. Is the model label on the box same as what you purchased?
If not, contact the distributor or local Lite-On representative.
3. After opening the box, is there any damp mark inside the box? Any damage or crack on
the drive enclosure?
If so, contact the distributor or local Lite-On representative.
4. Does the drive nameplate show the same model number as the carton label?
If not, contact the distributor or local Lite-On representative.
5. Are the manual and keypad in the carton?
If not, contact the distributor or local Lite-On representative.

2.3 Nameplate

Model number
Applicable motor rating
Input power supply
Output power supply

15
 2.4 Model Number Definition
EVO - 6800 S D75 E 20 F

Version: Keypad Type: Filter:

Product Series:
S: Standard E: LED □: No Filter
EVO: Lite-On AC Drive
C: LCD F: Filter Built-In
Series Name
Enclosure:
00: IP00
20: IP20
Voltage Class: Power Ratings: N□: NEMA□
21: AC 220V 1Phase 0D2: 0.2kW
23: AC 220V 3 Phases 0D4: 0.4kW
43: AC 440V 3 Phases D75: 0.75kW
1D5: 1.5kW
2D2: 2.2kW

2.5 Power Ratings

400V Class

Model
EVO680043S D40 D75 1D5 2D2 3D7 5D5 7D5 011 015 018 022 030 037 045 055 075 090 110
No.

HD 0.5 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150

HP
Max. ND 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 175

Motor HD 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
kW
Capacity
ND 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132

Voltage (V) /
three phase, 380~480 V , -15% ~ +10% , 50/60Hz
Frequency (Hz)

Current (ND) - - 5.4 6 10.8 14 25 31 38 45 60 75 92 115 150 180 215 260

Current (HD) 1.5 2.5 4.2 5.5 9.5 12.6 18.5 25 32 38 45 60 75 92 115 150 180 215

Rated Output
0~400 Hz
Output Frequency(Hz)

Carrier Frequency
2~12 1~15
(kHz)

Cooling Method Fanless Fan

Frame Size 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

16
2.6 Common Specifications
Item Specification
Control Method V/F, Sensorless Voltage Vector Control (SVVC)
Output Frequency 0 to 400 Hz
Digital Input: Within ±0.01% of the max. output frequency
Frequency
Accuracy Analog Input: Within ±0.1% of max. output frequency (-10℃ to
+50℃)
Frequency Setting Digital Input : 0.01Hz
Resolution Analog Output: 1/1000 of max. frequency

150% / 3Hz (V/F)

Starting Torque *1
200% / 0.3Hz (IM Sensorless Voltage Vector Control)
Control Characteristic

Speed Control 1: 40 (V/F)

Range *1 1:200 (IM Sensorless Voltage Vector Control)

Speed Control ±0.2% (Sensorless Voltage Vector Control)

Accuracy *1

Over 5Hz (Sensorless Voltage Vector Control)

Speed Response

Acc/Dec Time 0.0 to 6000.0

Braking Torque Approx. 20%
Filter Options C2（<7.5kW）
，C3（>11KW）
V/F Pattern 15 fixed patterns and 1 programmable pattern
120% for 1 min. in every 10 min. (Normal Duty)
150% for 1 min. in every 10 min. (Heavy Duty)
Overload Capacity
180% for 10 sec.. in every 10 min. (Heavy Duty)
200% for 11 sec.. in every 10 min. (Heavy Duty)
Operating Environment

Indoor without corrosive gas/liquid or flammable gas/liquid/oil

Area of Use
mist/dust
Ambient -10℃ to +50℃, -10℃ to +40℃ (NEMA1), below 90% RH without
Temperature froze or condensation
Storage
-20℃ to +60℃
Temperature
Altitude Up to 1000 meters

17
 Shock 10 to 20 Hz (9.8 m/s2) , 20 to 55 Hz (5.9 m/s2)
Enclosure IP20, NEMA1 (with optional NEMA kit)
Analog Input (AI) 1 points (AI2: 0V~10V, 0/4~20mA)
Number of I/O (<5.5kW models)

Digital Input (DI) 4 points

Analog Output
1 points (0~10V/0or4~20mA)
(AO)
Digital Output
1 points
(DO)
Relay Output (RO) 1 points
Pulse Input (PI) 1 point

Pulse Output (PO) N/A

Analog Input (AI) 2 points (AI1: -10V~10V, 0~10V AI2: 0V~10V, 0/4~20mA)
Number of I/O (>7.5kW models)

Digital Input (DI) 7 points(1 DI support PI 50kHz* )

Analog Output
2 points(AM:0~10V/0or4~20mA、FM:0~10V/-10~+10V)
(AO)
Digital Output
1 point
(DO)
Relay Output (RO) 2 points

Pulse Input (PI) 1 point(1 DI support PI 50kHz*)

Pulse Output (PO) 1 point

Communications Modbus (RS-485 port), Max. high speed is 115.2kbbs

Communication Option
Profibus-DP 、CANopen 、EtherCAT
Card

*1. Results tested in labs

18
2.7 Product Dimensions

Frame 1

EVO680043S1D5E20、EVO680043S2D2E20

Series Frame W W1 H H1 D D1 S1 Φ Φ1 Φ2

113 93 143 131 158.4 151 5.5 5.5 22 22

EVO6800 1

[4.45] [3.66] [5.63] [5.16] [6.24] [5.89] [0.22] [0.22] [0.87] [0.87]

19
Frame 2

EVO680043S3D7E20、EVO680043S5D5E20

Series Frame W W1 H H1 D D1 S1 Φ Φ1 Φ2

145 128 184 172 168 161 5.5 5.5 22 28

EVO6800 2

[5.71] [5.04] [7.25] [6.77] [6.56] [6.34] [0.22] [0.22] [0.87] [1.10]

20
Frame 3

EVO680043S7D5E20、EVO680043S011E20

Series Frame W W1 H H1 D D1

225[8.79] 202[7.89] 260[10.16] 242[9.46] 198[7.74] 190[7.42]

EVO6800 3 S1 Φ Φ1 Φ2 Φ3

6.5[0.25] 6.5[0.25] 22[0.86] 35[1.36] 44[1.73]

21
Frame 4

EVO680043S015E20、EVO680043S018E20

Series Frame W W1 H H1 D D1

235[9.25] 212[8.35] 340[13.38] 322[12.68] 218.2[8.59] 210[8.27]

EVO6800 4 S1 Φ Φ1 Φ2 Φ3

6.5[0.26] 6.5[0.26] 22[0.87] 28[1.10] 35[1.38]

22
Frame 6

EVO680043S037E20、EVO680043S045E20、EVO680043S055E20

Series Frame W W1 H H1 D S1

304[11.88] 270[10.55] 550[21.48] 530[20.70] 315[12.30] 11[0.43]

EVO6800 6 Φ

11[0.43]

23
 Chapter 3│Drive Installation

3.1 Installation Environment

To ensure the optimum drive performance, install the AC drive in a proper environment
specified below.

Environment Conditions
Area of Use Indoors
 -10°C to +40°C (NEMA 1 enclosure)
 -10°C to +50°C (IP20 enclosure)
 Do not install the drive in environments with wide temperature fluctuations
so as to ensure the drive reliability.
Ambient  When the drive is installed in an enclosure cabinet, make sure the cooling
Temperature works properly to keep the temperature within the specified levels.
 Do not allow the drive to freeze.

 When drives are installed side-by-side in a cabinet, follow the instruction

illustrated in Figure 3.2 to ensure the air flow.

 Under 90% RH
Humidity
 Free of condensation
Storage
-20°C to +60°C
Temperature
 Free from water, oil, metal shavings or other foreign materials.
 Free from flammable materials (e.g., wood)
 Free from harmful gases and liquids
Surrounding
 Free from direct sunlight
Area
 Free from oil mist, corrosive gas, flammable gas or dust.
 Free from radioactive material
 Pollution Degree 2

Up to 1000 m without derating. Up to 2000 meters with 1% rated current

Altitude
derated for every 100 m counted from 1000 m.

 10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s2

Vibration  20 to 55 Hz at 5.9 m/s2 (2A0004 to 2A0211, 4A0002 to 4A0165) , or 2.0

m/s2 (2A0250 to 2A0415, 4A0208 to 4A1200)

Enclosure IP20/NEMA 1.

24
3.2 Installation Direction and Spacing

3.2.1 Installation Direction

Install the AC drive upright for better cooling.

Figure 3.1 Installation Direction

OK NG NG

a. Upright installation b. Horizontal installation c. Transverse installation

3.2.2 Installation Spacing

3.2.2.1 Single Drive Installation

Install the AC drive as illustrated below to ensure the required space for airflow and wiring.

Figure 3.2 Installation Spacing for Single Drive

Note: Same amount of space is required for IP00 and NEMA 1 enclosure.

25
3.2.2.2 Side-by-Side Installation

Install the AC drives as illustrated below to ensure the required space for airflow and wiring.

A – Minimum 50 mm B - Minimum 30 mm C - Minimum 10 mm D - Minimum 150 mm

Figure 3.3 Installation Space for Side-by-Side Installation

Note: When installing drives of different sizes, align the tops of the drives for easier cooling fan
replacement.

26
3.3 Keypad and Terminal Cover Installation
It is not necessary to remove the keypad before wiring. You just need to loosen the terminal
cover screw and remove the terminal cover.
440V 1 to 40HP model enclosure are non-metal. Loosen terminal cover screw and remove
terminal cover for wiring. After wiring, affix the terminal cover back in position and tighten the
screw. For wiring instructions and screw tightening torque please refer to Chapter 4.

Step1: Loosen front screw Step2: take out the keypad Step3: Remove the terminal cover

Step4: Loosen screws of the wiring cover and Step5: locking screw, replace the
remove the wiring cover controller and wiring cover

27
3.4 Wiring Protection

3.4.1 Drive and Input Cable Protection for Short-Circuit Situations

Protect the drive and input power cable by using fuse in case potential short-circuit situations
cause overheat. Please refer to the following figure for proper wiring.

Input cables Moto

Fuse

Figure 3.4 Fuse Installation

3.4.2 Motors and Output Cable Protection for Short-Circuit Situations

If the output cables are properly selected according to the drive rated current, the drive itself is
fully capable of protecting the motor and output cables in case of short-circuit situations.

Note: If a single drive runs more than 1 motor, a separate thermal overload switch or a circuit
breaker is required.

3.4.3 Keypad Mounted on Panel Door

The keypad of EVO 8000 series can be removed and connected to the drive using an extension
cable. The remote keypad can be mounted on control panels with screws thread M4 X P0.7
28
and the screw length longer than the thickness of panel door.

3.5 Keypad Remote Usage

Keypad mounted on the drive can be removed and connected to the drive using an extension
cable to facilitate operation when the drive is installed in a location where it cannot be easily
accessed. It can also be permanently mounted remote locations such as panel doors using an
extension cable and an installation support set.

3.5.1 Remote Operation

3.5.1.1 Remote Operation (<5.5kW models)

Invertor Cable

Keypad

Connector

29
3.5.1.2 Remote Operation (>7.5kW models)

Invertor Cable

Connector

Keypad

3.5.1.3 Keypad Dimensions (<5.5kW models)

M4 X P0.7
pan head machine
screw x 4

Minimum 50mm

30
3.5.1.4 Keypad Dimensions (>7.5kW models)

M4 X P0.7
pan head machine screw x 4

Minimum 50mm

3.5.2 External/Face-Mount

3.5.2.1 External/Face-Mount (<5.5kW models)

M4 X P0.7
pan head machine screw x 4

Keypad

Enclosure panel

3.5.2.2 External/Face-Mount (>7.5kW models)

31
 M4 X P0.7
pan head
machine
screw x 4

Keypad

Enclosure panel

3.5.2.4 Panel Cut-Out Dimensions (<5.5kW models)

3.5.2.3 Panel Cut-Out Dimensions (>7.5kW models)

32
20.7
 2.8

34.2

93.0

36.0

33
 Chapter 4│Wiring

4.1 Wiring Safety

Danger

 Turn off all the power to the equipment before wiring. Wiring during power on could
cause electrical shocks to personnel.
 Allow only qualified personnel for installation, wiring, repairing and parts replacement.
 Capacitors in the drive may still be charged for a short time after shutting off the power.
Wait for the amount of time specified on the drive before any maintenance.
 Never touch input or output power cables. Do not connect any circuit to drive enclosure.

Warning

 Properly connect the motor ground terminal. Contacts between the motor ground
terminal and motor enclosure could result in electrical shocks or a fire.
 Ensure terminal screws are all tightened. Loose connection to the main circuit could
cause overheat or a fire.
 Verify if the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply
before applying power.
 Perform all wiring as specified in the wiring diagrams provided when installing braking
options. Failure to comply could result in drive, braking components damage or a fire.
 Do not disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage.
 Do not use unshielded cable for control circuit wiring. Failure to comply could cause
abnormal operation of drive.
 Use shielded twisted-pair cables and connect the shield to ground terminal of the drive.
 Do not modify the drive circuits. Failure to comply could cause drive damage.
 Ensure all connections are correct after connecting the drive with other devices.
 Rubber grommets located on conduit box shall be removed and replaced with conduit
hubs in the end use installation.
 Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection.
Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical
Code and any additional local codes”, or the equivalent
 Overtemperature protection is not provided by the drive.

34
4.2 Main Circuit

35
4.2.1 Main Circuit Terminal

Frame 1、2

EVO680043S1D5E20、EVO680043S2D2E20、EVO680043S3D7E20、EVO680043S5D5E20

DC Reactor
(option)

MCCB MC B1 B2
R R/L 1 U/T 1

S S/L 2 V/T 2 IM

T T/L 3 W/T 3
Fast Acting Fuse
E

Frmae 3

EVO680043S7D5E20、EVO680043S011E20

DC Reactor Breaking Resistor

(option) (option)

+1 +2/B1 B2
MCCB MC (DC+)
R R/L 1 U/T 1

S S/L 2 V/T 2 IM

T T/L 3 W/T 3
Fast Acting Fuse
E

Table 4.2.1 Main Circuit Terminal

36
 Table 4.2.1 Main Circuit Terminals

Terminal Name Terminal Description

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 Power input terminal

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 Power output terminal

+1, +2 (DC+) DC reactor terminal. Please remove the jumper before installation

B1, B2 Braking resistor terminal. Select option as per the specifications. (Please

refer to Chapter 7.1)

E Ground terminal

4.2.2 Main Circuit Wiring

4.2.2.1 Power Input Terminal

 Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) between three phase AC input power and
main circuit terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3. A magnetic contactor (MC) in series
connection is also suggested so as to shut off the power by drive protection functions.
Install a R-C varistor on both ends of the MC.
 Ensure main circuit terminal screws are tightened to avoid vibration loosening the screws
which could cause electric sparks.

4.2.2.2 Power Output Terminal

 When connecting a noise filter at AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3, always
use an inductive L-filter. Do not install any power capacitor, L-C or R-C filter.
 Connect AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 to motor input terminals U, V
and W respectively. Ensure the motor and drive terminals are in same phase sequence or
the motor will rotate reversely.
 Do not connect power cable to output terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could
cause drive damage and a fire.

4.2.2.3 DC Reactor and Braking Resistor Terminal:

 The terminal is to connect a DC reactor so as to improve power factor. The drive is

37
 shipped from the factory with a short-circuit jumper. Remove the jumper before
connecting a DC reactor.

DC Reactor (option)

+1 +2
(DC+)

 If the drive is used in a high-frequency or heavy duty application which requires frequent
braking or shorter deceleration time, install an optional braking resistor to increase the
braking torque.

Braking Resistor (option)

B1 B2

 Please refer to the wiring diagram when installing braking options.

4.2.2.4 Ground Terminal

 Use grounding cables of dimensions regulated by electrical equipment standard. Shrink

wiring distance to prevent leakage current resulting unstable electrical potential at the
terminal distant from grounding terminal.
 Do not use share the same grounding cable with welding machines or any device
requiring large current. Failure to comply could cause drive or equipment malfunction.
 Do not wind the grounding cable when multiple drives are installed. Failure to comply
could cause drive or equipment malfunction.
 Ensure the neutral of the input side and drive terminal " “ are grounded
according to the local electrician regulations. 3WYE (e.g. TN and TT) system are
suggested for the drive primary side.

4.2.2.5 Jumper：

 EVO8000 complies with the European LVD standard EN 61800-5-1 (2007) reducing the
current leakage to below 10mA DC under testing condition regulated by IEC 60990
(1999).
 Follow the instructions below to remove the jumper if an even lower current leakage to a

38
 even lower level.
 Removing the jumper may increase the signal interference

4.2.2.6 Ring Terminal

 Main circuit terminal should be used with crimp ring terminal wiring，
 Please refer to the diagram about ring terminal size, where the 8 AWG and 10 AWG bare
recommend using W size must be less than 10.5 mm, d2 size must be greater than 5.0
 Ring terminal shall be insulated cover of the terminal block wiring, which can form a reference KST
RVBS8-5 & KST RVB5-5 or similar size ring terminals to facilitate wiring and other operations

Terminal Specifications
Diameter Terminal Type
W d2 d1 D F E L T

AWG 8 RVBS8-5 8.8 5.3 4.5 8.5 10.5 16.7 31.6 1.2

AWG 10 RVB5-5 9.5 5.3 3.4 6.4 8.3 13 26 1

39
 4.2.3 Main Circuit Cable Size and Tightening Torque
Select the cables and crimp terminals according to Table 4.2.2.

1. The recommended cables (copper conductors) are 600 V vinyl-sheathed cables which have
continuous temperature tolerance up to 75°C with ambient temperature tolerance up to 40 °C,
wiring distance up to 100 meters and conditions suitable for on Normal Duty mode.

2. Terminal +1, +2, B1 and B2 are only for connecting DC reactor and braking resistor options.
Do not connect it to other devices.

3. Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting cable sizes. Increase the cable size
when the voltage drop exceeds 2% of the motor rated voltage. The amount of voltage drop
can be calculated using the following formula:

Line drop voltage (V) = 3 × cable resistance (Ω/km) × cable length (m) × current (A) × 10-3

Table 4.2.2 Cable Size and Tightening Torque (Three-phase 400 V)

Asia USA Europe & China Terminal Tightening
Drive
Terminal Suggested Applicable Suggested Applicable Suggested Applicable Screw Torque
Rating Cable Size Cable Size Cable Size Cable Size Cable Size Cable Size
Thread Nm ( lb.in.)
mm2 mm2 AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil mm2 mm2
1.5kW ~ B1,B2,-,R/L1, 1.3 1.3~ 3.3 16 16 ~ 12 1.3 1.3~ 3.3 M4 1.36
2.2kW S/L2,T/L3,
U/T1,V/T2,W
/T3

3.7kW ~ B1,B2,-,R,S,T, 3.309 3.309~8.368 3.309 ~

8 12 ~ 8 3.309 M4 1.8 (15.9)
5.5kW U,V,W 8.368

7.5kW ~ DC1,DC2,B2,- 8.3 5.3 ~ 8.3 8 10 ~ 8 8.3 5.3 ~ 8.3 M5 2.26

11kW , （20）
R,S,T,U,V,W

40
4.3 Control Circuit

41
4.3.1 Control Circuit Terminals

4.3.1.1 Control circuit input and output terminal (<5.5kW (more) models )

Table 4.3.1.1 Control Circuit Input Terminal

Terminal
Terminal Type Terminal Name Terminal Description
Code
S1 Digital input terminal 1 (forward/stop) Photocoupler, 24 V / 8 mA.
S2 Digital input terminal 2 (reverse/stop) Use Sink / Source switch to select
Digital input terminal 3 (external fault signal multi-function digital input type.
S3
1) The default is Sink mode.
In addition to the characteristic S1
Multi-Function
~ S3, but also for the high-speed
Digital Inputs
pulse input channel.
S4 Digital input terminal 4 (Jog command) Maximum input frequency: 50KHz
High voltage: 10 ~ 24V
Low voltage: 0 ~ 0.5V
For digital inputs, switch Sink /

42
 Source mode must be external
connection

S4C High-speed pulse signal common terminal

+V Auxiliary power terminal +10V Analog input power+10V / 20mA
Voltage or current input
Analog input terminal 1
A2 (Selectable). 0 or 4 to 20mA, 0 to
(auxiliary frequency command)
10V
The ground terminal for control
Multi-Function
PE Ground terminal signals to avoid interference. Use
Analog Inputs
shielded cables only.
AC Common terminal for analog signals
COM Digital control signal common terminal
+24V auxiliary power terminal for analog Digital control signal power
24V
input + 24V / 50mA

Table 4.3.1.2 Control Circuit Output Terminals

Termina
Terminal Type Terminal Name Terminal Description
l Code
Photocoupler Output
D1 Photocoupler Output terminal 1
30 V, 2 to 15 mA
Multi-Functio
DC Digital Output terminal
n
Voltage or current output
Photocoupler Multi-function analog output terminal
AM (Selectable) 0 or 4 to 20mA, 0 to
Output (output current )
10V
AC Analog common terminal

43
 4.3.1.2 <5.5kW models, NPN and PNP wiring

NPN models (S1~S3)

Internal power supply External power supply (Remove the J13 short
circuit PIN)

24V 24V

24V 24V Ext.

COM COM

S1~S3 S1~S3

PNPmodels (S1~S3)

Internal power supply External power supply (Remove the J13 short
circuit PIN)

24V 24V

24V 24V Ext.

COM COM

S1~S3 S1~S3

Due to multi-function input terminal S4 common pulse function, wiring and S1 ~ S3 different
way, way below refer to the wiring

44
 NPN models (S4)

Internal power supply External power supply (Remove the J13 short
circuit PIN)

24V 24V

24V
COM COM 24V Ext.

S4 S4

S4C S4C

PNPmodels (S4)

Internal power supply External power supply (Remove the J13 short
circuit PIN)

24V 24V

24V
COM COM 24V Ext.

S4 S4

S4C S4C

45
4.3.1.3 Control circuit input and output terminal (>7.5kW (more) models )

Table 4.3.1.3 Control Circuit Input Terminal

Terminal
Terminal Type Terminal Name Terminal Description
Code
S1 Digital input terminal 1 (forward/stop)
S2 Digital input terminal 2 (reverse/stop)
S3 Digital input terminal 3 (external fault 1) Photocoupler, 24 V, 8 mA.
S4 Digital input terminal 4 (fault reset) Use NPN/PNP switch to select
Digital input terminal 5 (multi-step multi-function digital input type.
S5
Multi-Function speed 1) The default is NPN mode.
Digital Inputs Digital input terminal 6 (multi-step
S6
speed 2)
In addition to the characteristic S1
~ S6, but also for the high-speed
S7 Digital input terminal 7 (Jog command)
pulse input channel.
Maximum input frequency: 50KHz

46
 High voltage: 10 ~ 24V
Low voltage: 0 ~ 0.5V
For digital inputs, switch Sink /
Source mode must be external
connection
S7C High-speed pulse signal common terminal
COM Digital control signal common terminal
Analog input
+V Auxiliary power terminal +10V
power+10V
Analog input terminal 1 Voltage input
A1
(main frequency command) 0 to 10V / -10V to +10V
Voltage or current input
Analog input terminal 2
A2 (Selectable). 0 or 4 to
(auxiliary frequency command)
20mA, 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V
The ground terminal for
control signals to avoid
Multi-Function PE Ground terminal
interference. Use
Analog Inputs
shielded cables only.
Digital control signal
power + 24V
(INT port selection by
short-circuiting)
24V +24V auxiliary power terminal for analog input INT: short circuit, internal
offer
+ 24V / 200mA: open,
externally supplied +
24V

Table 4.3.1.2 Control Circuit Output Terminals

Terminal
Terminal Type Terminal Name Terminal Description
Code
D1 Photocoupler Output terminal 1 (zero speed) Photocoupler Output
Multi-Function
D2 Photocoupler Output terminal 2 (speed agree) 48 V, 2 to 50 mA
Photocoupler
D+ RS485 communication terminal, standard RS485 interface, use twisted pair
Output
D- or shielded wire
Programmable analog output terminal (output Voltage Output
FM
Multi-Function frequency) 0 to 10V, -10 to +10V
Analog Output Multi-function analog output terminal (output Voltage or current
AM
current ) output (Selectable) 0 or

47
 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10V

AC Analog common terminal

Multi-Function
Multi-function pulse train output (output
Pulse Train MP 32KHz Max
frequency)
Output
<1> Do not assign frequent switching functions such as ON/OFF to terminals R1 and R2, which may
shorten the relay terminal life.

4.3.1.4 >7.5kW models, NPN and PNP wiring

Internal power supply External power supply (Remove the J13 short
circuit PIN)

NPN PNP

S7 S7

S7C S7C

24V 24V

COM COM

48
4.3.2 Control Circuit Cable Size and Tightening Torque
Select the cable according to Table 4.3.2.1 and 4.3.3.2. Use crimp ferrules on the cable ends for
simpler and more reliable wiring.

Table 4.3.2.1 Cable Size and Tightening Torque (<5.5kW models)

Bare Cable Ferrule-Type Terminal
Tightening
Applicable Suggeste Applicable Suggeste
Screw Torque
Terminal Size d Size Size d Size Cable Type
Size Nm
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
( lb.in.)
( AWG) ( AWG) ( AWG) ( AWG)
10V, A2, AC, AM, D1, DC, M2.5 0.4 0.13 ~ 2.08 0.13 0.41 ~ 1 0.41
Shielded
COM, 24V, SC, S1, S2, S3, S4, (3.52) (26 ~ 14) (26) (17 ~ 21) (17)
cable, etc.
PE
R1A, R1B, R1C M2.5 0.57 0.13 ~ 3.31 0.13 3.31 ~ 5.26 3.31 Shielded

(5) (26 ~ 12) (26) (12 ~ 10) (12) cable, etc.

49
 表 4.3.2.2 Cable Size and Tightening Torque (>7.5kW models)
Bare Cable Ferrule-Type Terminal
Tightening
Applicable Suggeste Applicable Suggeste
Screw Torque
Terminal Size d Size Size d Size Cable Type
Size Nm
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
( lb.in.)
( AWG) ( AWG) ( AWG) ( AWG)
AC,V+,FM,A1,AM,A2,24V,S1, M2.5 0.59 0.13 ~ 1.31 0.13 0.13 ~ 0.33 0.13
Shielded
S2,S3,S4,S5,S6,S7,COM,S7C, (5.2) (26 ~ 16) (26) (26 ~ 22) (26)
cable, etc.
D+,MP,D-DC,PE,D1
R1A,R1B,R1C,R2A,R2C M2.5 0.59 0.2 ~ 3.31 0.2 0.2 ~ 0.33 0.2 Shielded

(5.2) (24 ~ 12) (24) (24 ~ 22) (24) cable, etc.

4.3.3 Ferrule-Type Terminals

Always use ferrule-type terminals with insulated sleeves. Refer to Table 4.3.3.2. for dimensions.
In addition, crimping tool CRIMPFOX ZA-3 manufactured by Phoenix Contact is
recommended.

Table 4.3.3.2 Ferrule-Type Terminal Models and Sizes

Cable Size L d1 d2
Type Manufacturer
mm2 ( AWG) ( mm) ( mm) ( mm)
0.25 ( 24) AI 0.25-6YE 10.5 0.8 2 Phoenix Contact
0.34 ( 22) AI 0.34-6TQ 10.5 0.8 2 Phoenix Contact
0.5 ( 20) AI 0.56-WH 14 1.1 2.5 Phoenix Contact

50
4.4 I/O Connections

4.4.1 NPN and PNP Mode Selection

Use Sink/Source DIP switch on the control board to set NPN/PNP mode for multi-function
digital inputs S1 to S7. (Default: NPN mode)

Figure 4.4.1 Sink/Source DIP Switch

51
4.4.2 Terminal A2 Voltage/Current Input Selection

Select voltage or current input at terminal A2

 To select current as the input type, set DIP switch A2 to I and set parameter E3-06 to 0 (0
to 20 mA) or 1 (4 to 20 mA).
 To select voltage as the input type, set DIP switch A2 to V and set parameter E3-06 to 2 (0
to 10 V) or 3 (0 to 5 V).

Figure 4.4.2 DIP Switch A2

Table 4.4.1 DIP Switch A2 Settings (Terminal A2)

Setting Description
V Voltage input (0 to 10 V or 0 to 5 V)
I Current input (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA) (default)

Table 4.4.2 Parameter E3-06

No. Parameter Name Description Setting Range Default

Selects the signal level for terminal A2.
0: 0 ~ 20 mA
Terminal A2 Signal Level
E3-06 1: 4 ~ 20 mA 0, 1, 2, 3 1
Selection
2: 0 ~ 10 V
3: 0~5V

52
4.4.3 Terminal AM Voltage/Current Output Selection

Select voltage or current output type for terminal AM

 To select voltage as the output type, set DIP switch AM to V and set parameter E4-04 to 0
(0 to 10 V) .
 To select current as the output type, set DIP switch AM to I and set parameter E4-04 to 1 (0
to 20 mA) or 2 (4 to 20 mA).

Figure 4.4.3 DIP Switch AM

Table 4.4.3 DIP Switch AM Setting (Terminal AM)

Setting Description
V Voltage output (0 to 10 V)
I Current output (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA) (default)

Table 4.4.4 Parameter 4-04

Setting
No Parameter Name Description Default
Range
Selects the signal level for
terminal AM
Terminal AM Signal Level
E4-04 0 : 0 to 10 V 0, 1, 2 2
Selection
1 : 0 to 20 mA
2 : 4 to 20 mA
53
4.4.4 RS-485 Communication Termination ON / OFF Switch

The default of termination resistor for RS-485 communication is OFF. Switch it to ON when the
drive is the last in a series of slave drives. Set this termination resistor on DIP switch RS485
illustrated in Figure 4.4.4.

Figure 4.4.4 DIP Switch RS-485 Termination Resistor

4.5 Connection to PC
The drive is equipped with a USB port. The drive can connect to a PC through USB cable to
manage parameter settings using LiteOn PC software.

Note: When USB connection is detected, the communication will be automatically switched
from RS485 to USB, and return to RS-485 when USB is disconnected.

Figure 4.5 Connection to PC

54
4.6 Wiring Checklist
Table 4.6 Wiring Checklist
□ No. Item Page
Power Supply Voltage and Output Voltage
□ 1 Power supply voltage is within the voltage range of specified drive input.
□ 2 The motor voltage matches the drive output specifications.
□ 3 The drive rating matches the motor rating.
Main Circuit Wiring
□ 4 An MCCB of proper specifications is connected between the drive and motor.
□ 5 Power cables are correctly connected to drive input terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3.
□ 6 Motor terminals and drive terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 are in same phase
sequence. (Otherwise the motor will rotate reversely)
□ 7 Power supply and motor power cable complies with electrician regulations.
□ 8 The drive is properly grounded.
□ 9 Drive terminal screws of the main circuit and ground are tightened.
□ 10 An MC is installed for each motor if a single drive runs more than on motor.
Power Supply
电源
变频器
AC Drive

电磁接触器
Magnetic Contactor
Note: Set MC1 to MCn OFF before operating the drive. Do not switch MC1 to MCn
ON or OFF during run.
□ 11 When using a braking resistor or braking unit, an MC is installed on the drive input
side and able to shut off the power to drive when overloaded.
Control Circuit Wiring
□ 12 Twisted-pair cables are used for all drive control circuit wiring.
□ 13 Shielded cables are connected to the terminals.
□ 14 Options (if any) are properly installed.
□ 15 No wiring mistakes.
□ 16 Do not use a buzzer to check wiring.
□ 17 The control circuit terminal screws are tightened.
□ 18 No cable clippings or screws are left inside the drive enclosure.
□ 19 Control circuit wiring and main circuit wiring are separated.

55
 Chapter 5│Keypad

5.1 Keypad
Use the keypad to enter RUN and STOP commands, display data, fault, alarm and set
parameters.

5.1.1 Keys and Displays

14
13

1 11

2 10

3 9

12

4 5 67 8

Figure 5.3.1 Keypad

56
 Table 5.1.1 Keypad Keys and Displays

No
Button Name Function

1 User-defined function key for Quick

FN1 Key
Setting Mode

2
FWD/REV Key Forward/reverse selection

 Moves the cursor to the right

3
 Resets the drive to clear a fault
RESET Key situation

4
RUN Key Runs the drive

 Enters or exits the parameter

5
group
MENU Key  Switches the displayed menu

6 Selects parameter numbers,

UP/DOWN Key increments and decrements setting

7
value and frequency

8
STOP Key Stops the drive

57
  Enters parameter value, parameter
9
and setting
ENTER Key  Enters parameter setting menu.

10 LO/RE Key LOCAL、REMOTE控制选择。

ENTER Key:

 Enters parameter value, parameter

and setting
Non-Slip  Enters parameter setting menu.
11
Dial:
Setting Dial

Increases or decreases parameter

numbers, setting value and frequency

12 RUN Light Refer to Table 5.1.2.2

13 RPM Light Refer to Table 5.1.2.2

14

Hz Light Refer to Table 5.1.2.2

58
5.1.2 Keypad Display

5.1.2.1 LED Display.

Table 5.1.2.1 LED Display

Number LED Number LED Number LED Number LED

/Letter Display /Letter Display /Letter Display /Letter Display

0 9 i r

1 A J S

2 b K Nil t

3 c L U

4 d M Nil v

5 E n W Nil

6 F o X Nil

7 G P y Nil

8 H q Nil Z Nil

59
5.3.2.2 LED Indication

Table 5.3.2.2 LED Indication

Indicator Light Lit Blinking Off

 Drive in deceleration
 Output frequency
Drive in operation Drive not in operation
below the minimum
frequency

Displaying output
Nil Nil
speed

Displaying output
Nil Nil
frequency

60
5.1.3 Keypad Programming

 Keypad Display Menu Structure

A. Standard setting mode: Press MENU to enter or exit the parameter group. Press ENTER,
MENU, UP, DOWN and RESET to monitor and edit settings.
B. Quick monitoring parameters mode: FN2 function keys for using quickly most of the
parameters monitored, and use the up and down keys to switch parameters want to
monitor.

( 1 sec )

MENU ENTER ENTER

MENU
UP/DOWN/RESET
UP/DOWN/RESET

MENU

UP/DOWN UP/DOWN UP/DOWN UP/DOWN UP/DOWN

MENU

U1-03 (output U1-06 (Main circuit U1-05 (Output

U1-04 (Motor speed) AI1 (percnet) AI2 (percent)
frequency) DC Voltage) voltage command)

C. Quick setting mode: User must assign the function to the FN1 key in advance so as to
quickly set the parameter by pressing FN1 key.

( 1 sec )

FN1 ENTER ENTER

FN1 MENU
UP/DOWN/RESET UP/DOWN/RESET

61
 Chapter 6│Parameters

6.1 Group A, Initialization

Sets the initial parameters (group A parameter) such as Access Level Selection, password and
etc.

A1 Initialization

 A1- 00 Retain

 A1- 01 Access Level Selection

Selects access level (edit/ view)

No. Name Setting Range Default
A1-01 Access Level Selection 0, 1, 2 2

0 : View Only

Access to only parameter A1-01

1 : User-Defined Parameter Access

Access to only parameter A1-01 and A2-00 to A2-31

2 : All Parameter Access

All parameters can be edited and viewed

Note:
· Once the password is set to A1-05, user cannot edit A1-01, A1-03, A1-06, A2-01 to A2-32 before entering the
correct password in A1-04.
· Once E1-□□= 60 (Program Lockout) is set, user cannot edit any parameters before closing the assigned
terminal, even when A1-01 = 1 or 2.
· When using Modbus communication to edit parameters, it is not possible to edit parameters via keypad until
an ENTER command is given to the drive from the communication.

 A1- 02 Control Method Selection

No. Name Setting Range Default

A1-02 Control Method Selection 0 to 1 0

62
0 : V/F Control

This method is recommended for those applications without the need of fast response,
accurate speed control. Select this method also when using a single drive to run more than
one motors, the motor parameters are unknown or Auto-Tuning cannot be performed. The
speed control range is 1 : 40.

1 : SVVC

 A1-03 Reset

Resets parameter settings to default settings. After resetting parameters, the value will
automatically set to 0.
No. Name Setting Range Default
A1-03 Reset 0 to 9999 0

0: N/A

2538: Resets 2-Wire Sequence/ 50Hz / 380V

2541: Resets 2-Wire Sequence / 50Hz / 415V

2544: Resets 2-Wire Sequence / 50Hz / 440V

2546: Resets 2-Wire Sequence / 50Hz / 460V

2638: Resets 2-Wire Sequence / 60Hz / 380V

2641: Resets 2-Wire Sequence / 60Hz / 415V

2644: Resets 2-Wire Sequence / 60Hz / 440V

2646: Resets 2-Wire Sequence / 60Hz / 460V

3538: Resets 3-Wire Sequence / 50Hz / 380V

3541: Resets 3-Wire Sequence / 50Hz / 415V

3544: Resets 3-Wire Sequence / 50Hz / 440V

3546: Resets 3-Wire Sequence / 50Hz / 460V

3646: Resets 3-Wire Sequence / 60Hz / 460V

Note:
 The parameter listed in Table 6.1 will not be reset when setting 2220 or 3330 to A1-03.

63
 Table 6.1 Parameters Not Subject to Reset

NO. Name
A1-00 Retain
A1-02 Control Method Selection
A1-06 ND/HD Selection
d1-01 V/F Pattern Selection
d3-00 Retain
E6-05 Retain
P7-12 Installation Method Selection
o2-03 Drive Capacity Selection

 A1- 04/ A1- 05 Password

Set password to parameter A1-05 and enter the password to parameter A1-04 to unlock it.

No. Name Setting Range Default

A1-04 Password 0000 to 9999 0000
A1-05 Password Setting

■ Password and Password Setting

· Once the password other than 0000 is set to A1-05, user cannot edit A1-01 to A1-03, A1-06,
A2-01 to A2-32. Enter the correct password in A1-04 to unlock parameter access.
· A1-04 will display ”nULL”if password has never been set. The user can only set the
password (A1-05). Once the password is set, A1-05 will display ”LtH”. The user can only
enter the set password (A1-04).

Follow the steps to set the password and enter password:

Table 6.2.1 Password Setting Steps

Step

1 Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.

2 Press and select A1-04.

Press to display A1-04 setting. “nULL”is displayed as the

3
password has never been set.

4 Press to select A1-05.

64
 5 Press to display A1-05 setting.

6
Press or to set the password. (1234 is an

example)

7 Press to display A1-05 setting.

8 ”LtH”is displayed when entering A1-05 setting.

Table 6.2.2 Password Entering Steps

Step

1 Press and select A1-04.

Press to enter A1-04 setting. “nULL”is not displayed

2
anymore as the password has been set.

Press or to enter the correct password. (1234

3
is an example)
The display leaves A1-04 setting automatically as the parameters are
4
unlocked.

 A1- 06 ND/HD Selection

The drive has two duty modes for the load characteristics, heavy duty (HD) mode and normal
duty (ND) mode. The drive rated current and overload tolerance will change based on the duty
mode selection. Choose the suitable mode in A1-06 according to the application.
The HD mode provides 150% overload for 1 minute whereas the ND mode provides 120%
overload for 1 minute. Refer to the drive specifications for details.
No. Name Setting Range Default
A1-06 ND/HD Selection 0, 1 0 ( HD)

Table 6.3 Differences between Heavy Duty and Normal Duty

Characteristics Heavy Duty Rating (HD) Normal Duty Rating (ND)
A1-06 0 1

65
Performance
Overload
150 % Overload
120 %
Rated Load Rated Load
100 % 100 %

0 Motor Speed 100 % 0 Motor Speed 100 %

Suitable Applications Applications which require a high Applications which do not require a
overload tolerance at start, during high overload tolerance such as fans
acceleration or deceleration such as and pumps.
extruders and cranes.
Overload Tolerance (oL2) 150% for 1 minute 120% for 1 minute
Stall Prevention during 150% 120%
Acceleration (P3-01)
Stall Prevention during 150% 120%
Run (P3-06)
Carrier Frequency 8 kHz 2 kHz Swing PWM
Note: Changing the duty mode automatically changes the maximum motor rating that the drive can run, defaults of
d2-□□ and parameters related to the motor rating.

A2 User-Defined Parameters

 A2- 00 to A2- 31 User-Defined Parameters 1 to 32

Selects up to 32 parameters and assigns them to parameter A2-00 to A2-31.

No. Name Setting Range Default
A2-00 to A2-31 User-Defined Parameters 1 to 32 A1-00 to U4-08

■ Recently Edited Parameter Save

Saved parameters can be viewed in User-Defined Parameter Access. To assign specific

parameters to A2-00 to A2-31, set parameter A1-01 to 2. The saved parameters A2-00 to
A2-31 can only be viewed if A1-01 is set to 1.

 A2-32 User-Defined Parameter Automatic Save

Enables or disables the automatic save for A2-16 to A2-31.

No. Name Setting Range Default
A2-32 User-Defined Parameter Automatic Save 0, 1 1

0 : Enabled

Sets A2-32 to 0 to save the parameter manually.

66
1 : Disabled

Automatically saves the most recently edited parameters started from A2-16 to A2-31
(maximum 16 parameters). When the edited parameters are more than 16, only the most
recent 16 parameters will be saved while the old ones will be removed.

6.2 Group b, Application

b1: Operation Mode Selection

 b1- 00 Frequency Command Selection 1

Selects the frequency command source for the REMOTE mode.

Note:
 When the run command is input with 0 Hz frequency command or below the minimum frequency, the RUN
LED will blink.

 Press to switch the frequency command source to LOCAL even if b1-00 is not set to 0 (Keypad).

No. Name Setting Range Default

b1-00 Frequency Command Selection 1 0 to 4 1

0 : Keypad

Allows two ways to input the frequency command.

 Switching between the multi-step speed command in parameters L1-□□.
(With multi-function inputs of control circuit terminals )
 Entering the frequency command on the keypad.

1 : Control Circuit Terminal (Analog Input)

Allows a voltage or current input as analog frequency command from terminal A1 and A2.

□ Voltage Input

Allows a voltage signal input via terminals A1 and A2. Refer to Table 6.4 for parameter
settings.

Table 6.4 Frequency Command Using Voltage Signals

Parameter Settings
Signal
Terminal Signal Level Notes
Level Function Selection Gain Bias
Selection
67
 0 to 10 V E3-00 = 0 E3-01 = 0
A1 E3-02 E3-03
-10 to 10 V E3-00 = 1 (Main Frequency Command)
0 to 10 V E3-06 = 2 E3-07 = 0 Ensure DIP switch A2 is
A2 E3-08 E3-09
0 to 5 V E3-06 = 3 (Main Frequency Command) placed to V (voltage)

AC Drive AC Drive

+V 10V,20mA power supply +V 10V,20mA power supply

0 to 10V Main frequency command -10 to 10V Main frequency command
2kΩ A1 4kΩ A1
(voltage input) (voltage input)
A2 Main frequency command A2 Main frequency command
(voltage/current input) (voltage/current input)

AC Analog input common AC Analog input common

-V -10V,20mA power supply -V -10V,20mA power supply

Figure 6.1 Setting Frequency Command as a Voltage Signal at Terminal A1

Wire all the analog input terminals according to Figure 6.1. Ensure DIP switch A2 is placed to
V (voltage).

□ Current Input

Allows a voltage input via terminal A2. Refer to Table 6.5 for parameter settings.

Table 6.5 Frequency Command Using Current Signals

Parameter Settings
Terminal Signal Level Signal Level Function Notes
Gain Bias
Selection Selection
0 to 20 mA E3-06 = 0 Ensure DIP switch A2 is
A2 E3-07 = 0 E3-08 E3-09
4 to 20 mA E3-06 = 1 placed to I (current)

68
 Dip Switch A2
AC Drive V I

+V 10V,20mA power supply

A1 Main frequency gain

Main frequency
A2
command (current input)
0 to 20mA or
4 to 20mA
AC Analog input common

-V -10V,20mA power supply

Figure 6.2 Setting Frequency Command as a Current Signal at Terminal A2

Ensure DIP switch A2 is place d to I (current).

□ Switching between Main /Auxiliary Frequency Command

If either of analog input terminal A1 or A2 is set to 3 ( Auxiliary Frequency Command), the

multi-speed step 1 will follow analog input frequency command, for more detail please
refer to table 6.12.“Multi-Step Speed Command and Multi-Function Terminal
Combinations”

2 : Terminal UP/DOWN

Use digital input terminals S1 to S7 to increase or decrease the frequency.

3 : Modbus Communication

Allows frequency command via the Modbus communication. Make sure RS-485/422 serial
communications port is connected to control circuit terminals J1 and J4. Refer to “Modbus
Communication” for instructions.

4 : Pulse Train Input (Including PWM Signal Input)

Allows frequency command from pulse train input terminal RP

Pulse Train Input Confirmation

 Set b1-00 = 4, E5-00 = 0 (Frequency Command)

69
 Set the E5-01 (Pulse Train Input Scaling) equal to 100% frequency.
 Enter a pulse train signal to terminal RP to check if the correct frequency command is
displayed. ·

 b1- 01 Run Command Selection 1

Selects the run command source for the REMOTE mode.

No. Name Setting Range Default
b1-01 Run Command Selection 1 0 to 2 1

0 : Keypad

Allows the run command via the RUN key on the keypad.

1 : Control Circuit Terminal

Allows the run command via the digital input terminals using the following sequences.

□ 2-Wire Sequence

Two inputs (forward/stop, reverse/stop). Set E1-00 (Terminal S1 Function Selection) to 0

(Forward/Stop) and E1-01(Terminal S2 Function Selection) to 1(Reverse/Stop).

□ 3-Wire Sequence

Three inputs (forward, stop, forward/reverse). Set A1-03 = 3330 to reset the drive and
automatically assign the 3-wire sequence control function to terminals S1, S2 and S5.

2 : Modbus Communication

Allows Run commands via the Modbus communication. Make sure RS-485/422 serial
communications port is connected to control circuit terminals J1 and J4.

 b1-02 Stopping Method Selection

Selects the way the drive stops the motor when a Stop command is entered or the run
command is removed.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b1-02 Stopping Method Selection 0 to 3 0

0 : Ramp to Stop

The drive will decelerate the motor according to the active deceleration time. The default of
deceleration time is set in C1-01. The actual deceleration time will be changed depending on
the load characteristics such as inertia.
When decelerating a load with high inertia, the drive perform ramp-to-stop first and then start
70
DC braking to fully stop the motor. Refer to “b2 Group, DC Braking”for details.
□ For Open-Loop V/F Control, Closed-Loop V/F Control, Open-Loop Vector Control and PM
Open-Loop Vector Control:
When the output frequency falls below b2-00, DC Braking is enabled for the time set in
b2-03. Refer to Figure 6.3.

Run Command ON OFF

Output
Frequency
Deceleration Time

d1-08 Min. Output

Frequency DC Braking
b2-00 Zero Speed
Holding Start Frequency

b2-03
(DC Braking Time at Stop)

Figure 6.3 Ramp to Stop

Note: If the b2-00 value is smaller than the d1-08 value, DC Braking is enabled when the output frequency falls
below the d1-08 value.

□ For Closed-Loop Vector Control, PM Closed-Loop Vector Control

When the output frequency falls below the b2-00 level, Zero Speed Holding is enabled for
the time set to b2-03. Refer to Figure 6.3.

Run Command ON OFF

Output
Frequency
Deceleration Time

d1-08 Min. Output

Frequency Zero Speed Holding
b2-00 Zero Speed
Holding Start Frequency

b2-03
(DC Braking Time at Stop)
Figure 6.4 Ramp to Stop
Note: If the b2-00 value is smaller than the d1-08 value, Zero Speed Holding is enabled when the output
frequency falls below the d1-08 value.

71
1 : Coast to Stop

When a Stop command is given, the drive will shut off its output. Then the motor will coast to
stop for the time determined by the inertia and friction.

Run command
ON OFF

Output frequency
Drive output shut off

Motor speed

Figure 6.5 Coast to Stop

Note: After a Stop command is given, the drive will ignore any Run command entered until the minimum baseblock
time set to P2-01. Do not enter Run command until the motor has completely stopped. To restart the motor before
the complete stop, use DC braking at start (Refer to b2-02) or Speed Search (Refer to b3).

2 : DC Braking to Stop

When a Stop command is given, the drive will enter the current set to b2-01 to the motor after
waiting the minimum baseblock time set to P2-01. DC Braking to Stop significantly shorter the
stopping time compared to Coast to Stop.
Note: This function is not available in control methods for PM motors ( A1-02 = 4, 5, 6, 8).

72
 Run command
ON OFF

Output frequency b2-01 DC Braking current

Motor speed DC Braking time

Motor coasts

P2-01 Minimum
baseblock time

Figure 6.6 DC Braking to Stop

DC Braking time is determined by b2-03 (DC Braking Time at Stop) and the output frequency
when a Stop command was entered.
DC Braking time = (b2-03)×10×Output frequency / d1-02(Maximum output frequency)

DC Braking time

b2-03 * 10

b2-03

10% Output frequency at the time a 100%

Stop command is given Max. output frequency

Figure 6.7 DC Braking Time Depending on Output Frequency

Note: If an OCD (Overcurrent) fault occurs, increase the minimum baseblock time to P2-01.

3 : Coast to Stop with Timer

When a Stop command is given, the drive shuts off its output and the motor will coast to stop.
The drive will ignore any Run command until the wait time (t) ends.
73
 Run command
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

Output frequency
Drive output shut off

Wait time t

Figure 6.8 Coast to Stop with Timer

The wait time t is determined by the output frequency when the Stop command was given and
by the active deceleration time.
For example, if the deceleration time is 10 seconds, the maximum frequency is 50Hz and the
Stop command is entered when the speed is 25Hz, then the wait time is (25Hz/50Hz) * 10s =
5s.

 b1-03 Reverse Rotation Selection

Determines whether reverse rotation is enabled. For some applications such as fans and
pumps, reverse rotation could cause problems.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b1-03 Reverse Rotation Selection 0, 1 0

0 : Reverse Rotation Enabled

Drive accepts a run command of both forward and reverse directions

1 : Reverse Rotation disabled

Drive can accept only run command of forward direction

 b1-04 Retain

 b1-05 Run Command Action after Switch

The command source can be switched by pressing LO/RE key on the keypad, multi-function
terminal input E1- □□ = 3 (LOCAL/REMOTE Selection), E1-□ □ = 4 (Command Source 1/2
Selection) . Refer to parameter group E1 and LO/RE Key Function Selection (o2-00).

74
Enables or disables the protection to avoid an active Run command at the new source causing
a sudden movement on the motor when the command source is switched from the old source
to the new source.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b1-05 Run Command Action after Switch 0, 1 0

0 : Ignore Active Run Command at the New Source

If a Run command at the new source is active, the drive will not start or the drive will stop
operation if it was running, when switching from the old source to the new source. The drive
can start only when the Run command is removed and given again.

1 : Accept Active Run Command at the New Source

WARNING! If a run command at the new source is active, the drive will accept it and run the motor immediately
right after switching from the old source to the new source. Clear all personnel from the electrical connections and
the running machinery prior to switching command sources. Failure to comply could cause serious injury.

b1-05=1，If a run command at the new source is active, the

drive will accept it and run the motor immediately right after
switching from the old source to the new source.
b1-05=1

b1-05=0

REMOTE

LOCAL

RE RUN

RE STOP

OUTPUT
b1-05=0，If a Run command at the new source is active, the drive will not start or the
drive will stop operation if it was running, when switching from the old source to the new
source. The drive can start only when the Run command is removed and given again.

Figure 6.8.1 Run Command Action after Switch

 b1-06 Run Command Selection during Programming

For safety reasons, the drive will ignore a Run command when the keypad is being used to edit
parameters in Programming Mode. If allowing a Run command during programming is
required in the application, set this parameter to 1.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b1-06 Run Command Selection during Programming 0 to 2 0

75
0 : Run command disabled during Programming

A Run command is not accepted when the keypad is being used to edit parameters in
Programming Mode.

1 : Run command enabled during Programming

A Run command is accepted when the keypad is being used to edit parameters in
Programming Mode.

2 : Prohibit programming during run

The programming mode cannot be displayed during run except for monitoring parameter
Group U.

 b1- 07 Frequency Command Selection 2

Refer to the details of b1-00 (Frequency Command Selection 1). This parameter is only enabled
while E1-00 to 07 is set to 4 and the DIP switch is set to OFF.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b1-07 Frequency Command Selection 2 0 to 4 0
0 : Keypad
1 : Control Circuit Terminal (Analog Input)
2 : Terminal UP/DOWN
3 : Modbus Communication
4 : Pulse Train Input

 b1- 08 Run Command Selection 2

Refer to the details of b1-01 (Run Command Selection 1). Enabled while E1-00 to 07 is set to 4
and the DIP switch is set to OFF
No. Name Setting Range Default

b1-08 Run Command Selection 2 0 to 2 0

0 : Keypad
1 : Control Circuit Terminal (Sequence Control Input)
2 : Modbus Communication

 b1- 09 Frequency superposition Selection

No. Name Setting Range Default

b1-09 Frequency superposition Selection 0,1 0

0 ：Disabled

76
 Frequency command as a single source b1-00 (or b1-07) set of values

1 ：Enabled

Frequency command as
B1-00 and b1-07 frequency instruction set of the superposition of two sources of value, the
frequency superimposed b1-00 and b1-07 can not set to the same source, otherwise it will
be tripped OPE13 error, but not in this simulation input limit (when superimposed b1-00
and b1-07 can simultaneously set to 1). Frequency superposition function is valid only in
Remote mode, Local mode is invalid

Note : b1-00 and b1-07 is set to analog input simultaneously superimposed use, it will be forced
to specify as input source b1-00 of AI1, AI2 as the input source b1-07. If b1-00 and b1-07 are not
all 1, setting b1-09 = 1, E3-01 = 0, E3-07 = 0, it will be tripped OPE07 error

 b1- 10 Run Command at Power up

Determines to accept or ignore an active Run command from Remote during power up.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b1-10 Run Command at Power up 0,1 0

0 : Ignore

Drive ignores an active run command during power up.

Note: The LED indicator blinks when there is an active Run command from Remote during power up. The drive can
start only when the Run command is removed and entered again.

1 : Accept

Drive accepts an active Run command from Remote during power up and starts the motor
immediately

WARNING! The drive will run the motor immediately at power up if there an active Run command from Remote.
Ensure the protection measures are taken and clear all personnel from the electrical connections and the running
machinery prior to switching command sources. Failure to comply could cause serious injury.

 b1- 12 Allowing Local/Remote selection during run

No. Name Setting Range Default

b1-12 Allowing Local/Remote selection 0,1 0
during run
0 ：Disable

77
Local / Remote cannot be switched even the Local / Remote terminal is ON during run.

1 ：Enable

Local / Remote can be switched when the Local / Remote terminal is ON during run.

For the sake of safety, if the command has been switched from Remote to Local, the drive will remain
frequency and run command from remote side, but if the command has been switched from Local to
Remote, the drive will operate depends on the frequency and run command from remote side
immediately. (Parameter b1-12 is not limited by b1-05)

WARNING! Please make sure the frequency and run command is correct when switching Local to
Remote during run.

b2 DC Braking

 b2-00 Zero Speed Holding (DC Braking) Start Frequency

Sets the start frequency for Zero Speed Holding (DC braking). Enabled when b1-02 (Stopping
Method Selection) is set to 0 (Ramp to Stop)
No. Name Setting Range Default
b2-00 Zero Speed Holding (DC Braking) Start Frequency 0.0 to 10.0 Hz 0.5 Hz
This function operates differently according to the selected control method.

□ Open-Loop V/F Control, Closed-Loop V/F Control, Open-Loop Vector Control ( A1- 02 = 0,

1, 2) , PM Open-Loop Vector Control ( A1- 02 = 4)

When the output frequency falls below the level set in this parameter, DC Braking is enabled
for the time set to b2-03 (DC Braking Time at Stop).

DC
d1-08 Min. Output Frequency Braking
b2-00 Zero Speed Holding Start Level

Output
Time
frequency b2-03
DC Braking Time at Stop

Figure 6.13 DC Braking Time at Stop

Note: When Zero Speed Holding Start Frequency (b2-00) is lower than Minimum Output Frequency (d1-08),
Zero Speed Holding starts at Minimum Output Frequency (d1-08).

□ IM/ PM Closed-Loop Vector Control ( A1- 02 = 3, 5)

78
 Use b2-00 to set the start frequency for Zero Speed Holding at stop. When the output
frequency falls below the b2-00 level, the drive perform Zero Speed Holding for the
durating set in b2-03 (DC Braking Time at Stop)

DC
d1-08 Min. Output Frequency Braking
b2-00 Zero Speed Holding Start Level

Output
Time
frequency b2-03
DC Braking Time at Stop

Figure 6.14 Zero Speed Holding at Stop

Note: When Zero Speed Holding Start Frequency (b2-00) is lower than Minimum Output Frequency (d1-08),
Zero Speed Holding starts at Minimum Output Frequency (d1-08).

 b2-01 DC Braking Current

Sets the DC braking current as a percentage of the drive rated current. When the current is set
to more than 30%, the carrier frequency is automatically decreased to 1kHz.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b2-01 DC Braking Current 0 to 100% 30%
The DC Braking current level affects the magnetic field strength to hold the motor shaft. The
higher the current level is set, the higher amount of heat will be generated by the motor.
Therefore do not set this value higher than the level necessary to hold the motor shaft.

 b2- 02 DC Braking Time at Start

Sets the DC braking time at start to stop a coasting motor before restarting it or to apply
braking torque at start when a high starting torque is needed. Disabled when set to 0.00.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b2-02 DC Braking Time at Start 0.00 to 99.99 s 0.00 s
Note: Attempting to run a coasting motor without using DC Braking or Speed Search may trigger oV (Overvoltage)
or oC (Overcurrent) fault. Use DC Braking to stop the motor or use Speed Search to detect the motor speed before
restarting it

 b2- 03 DC Braking Time at Stop

Sets the DC braking time at stop to stop a motor rotating with high inertia. Disabled when set
to 0.00.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b2-03 DC Braking Time at Stop 0.00 to 99.99 s Determined by A1-02

b3 Speed Search
79
The Speed Search function is to detect the actual motor speed driven by the inertia and
starting the motor operation from the current speed directly without a stop. When a
momentary power loss shuts off the drive and causes motor to coast. Speed Search helps the
drive to detect the speed of the coasting motor and restart directly.
The Speed Search method of the drive is current detection type. Follow the settings and
instructions below.

 b3- 00 Speed Search Setting

No. Name Setting Range Default

b3-00 Speed Search Setting 0 to 2 0
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled and searched from the highest frequency
2 : Enabled and searched from the frequency command
3 : Retain
4 : Retain

 b3- 01 Speed Search Operating Current

Sets the current level as a percentage of the drive rated current below which Speed Search is
deactivated. This parameter normally does not require any change. Lower this current level if
the drive cannot restart the motor.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b3-01 Speed Search Operating Current 0 to 100% 80%

 b3- 02 Retain

b4 Timer Function

The drive has the independent timer function. To enable this function, assign Timer Input (E1-□
□ =52) to multi-function input terminals S1 to S7, and Timer Output (E2- □ □ =15) to
multi-function output terminals R1, R2, D1-DC and D2-DC. Set on-delay and off-delay time
separately to eliminate the oscillation from sensors.
Set

 b4- 00, b4- 01 Timer Function On-Delay and Off-Delay Time

Sets the on-delay and off-delay time to switch on/off the timer output.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b4-00 Timer Function On-Delay Time 0.0 to 3000.0 s 0.0 s
b4-01 Timer Function Off-Delay Time 0.0 to 3000.0 s 0.0 s

80
■ Timer Function Operation

When the timer input closes for longer than the time set to b4-00, the timer switches on. When
the timer input opens for longer than the time set to b4-01, the timer switches off. The Timer
Function operation is illustrated in Figure 6.15.

On (Closed)
ON ON
Multi-Function
Off (Open)
Input (Timer Input)

On (Closed)
Multi-Function Output
ON ON
Off (Open)
(Timer Output)

b4-00 b4-01 b4-00 b4-01

Figure 6.15 Timer Function Operation

b5 PID Control

PID control utilizes Proportional, Integral and Derivative Control to minimize the deviation
between the PID target and feedback.

■ P Control

P control outputs the proportion of P gain and the deviation linearly. With only P control, the
deviation will not fall to 0.

■ I Control

I control outputs the integral of the deviation. This minimizes the deviation between the PID
target and feedback but not suitable for rapid load fluctuations.

■ D Control

D control multiplies a time constant with deviation derivative (deviation slope) to predict the
deviation, and then adds this value to the PID input. This utilizes derivative to control the
braking and vibration.
D control tends to cause instability as the interference to deviation signal is larger. Use P
control only when necessary.

■ PID Control Operation

See the PID operation illustrated below how the P, I and D output frequency changes when the
deviation between the PID target and feedback is constant.

81
 PID input
time

PID output

I control
PID output

P control

time

Figure 6.16 PID Operation

■ PID Control Applications

PID control can be used in the following applications.

Application Description Sensors Used
Speed Adjusts the machinery speed to the target speed. Tachometer
Control Synchronizes the machinery speed from other
machinery as the target speed.
Pressure Feeds back pressure date to maintain constant pressure. Pressure sensor
Control
Fluid Control Feeds back flow data to keep a constant flow level Flow rate sensor
Temperature Feeds back temperature data to maintain a constant Thermistor, thermocoupler
Control temperature by control the fan speed.

■ PID Target Input Methods

The PID target can be input according to the methods showed in Table 6.6. If more than one
PID targets are input, it will be selected as per the priority.
Ex. When E3-01=9 (PID Target) and E5-00=2 (PID Target), the signal from terminal A1 will be
selected as the PID target.
Table 6.6 PID Target Input Sources

Priority PID Target Input Settings

Sources
Highest * Terminal A1 Set E3-01 to 9 (PID target)
Terminal A2 Set E3-07 to 9 (PID target)

82
 Terminal RP Set E5-00 to 2 (PID target)
Parameter b5-18 Set b5-17 to 1, and input the PID target to b5-18.
Lowest Modbus Register Set bit 1 in Modbus register 000FH to 1 (PID target
input) and input the target to 0006H.
Note: When both terminal A1 and A2 are set to 9 (PID Target), oPE07 fault will be triggered.

■ PID Feedback Input Methods

There are two input methods. The first is to input one feedback signal for normal PID control.
The second is to input two signals to control the deviation in between.

Normal PID Feedback:

Selects the PID feedback signal in the source listed in Table 6.7.
Table 6.7 PID Feedback Sources

Priorty PID Feedback Source Setting

Higher Terminal A1 Set E3-01 to 8 (PID feedback)
Terminal A2 Set E3-07 to 8 (PID feedback)
Lower Terminal RP Set E5-00 to 1 (PID feedback)
Note: A1, A2 if the same is set to 8 (PID feedback value), OPE07 (AI parameter setting error) fault will be triggered.

■ PID Differential Feedback

Selects the second PID feedback signal used for deviation calculation in Table 6.8. Assigning a
differential feedback input will automatically activate the differential feedback function.
Table 6.8 PID Differential Feedback Sources
PID Differential Feedback Source Settings
Terminal A1 Set E3-01 to 10 (differential feedback)
Terminal A2 Set E3-07 to 10 (differential feedback)
Note: When more than one PID feedback differential input source is assigned, oPE07 fault will be triggered.

83
 Frequency Reference
Frequency Reference
( b1-00 / b1-07 )
PID disable when：
Run ON/OFF
1. b5-00 = 0
+
2. a JOG Command is Input B5-15
0 3. PID Disable by Digital Input Enabled -
Frequency Reference
1~16 Delay Timer
1 B5-14
Terminal A1 / A2
Sleep Level
2 Sleep Function
Terminal Up/Down
Modbus 3

Figure 6.17 PID Block Diagram

Communication
4
Pulse Input
Disabled
+
PID Mode Output Frequency
b5-00 = 1 or 2
b5-00 = 3 or 4 + Enabled SFS
C1-_ _

84
PID Target
PID Output
( U4-02 )
Modbus register Upper Limit Fmax x109%
1 0 PID Set Point
0
( U4-03 )
PID Target
( b5-18 ) not 1 PID SFS Cancel DI Enable / Disable Reverse
( E1-_ _ = 50 ) 1
b5-17 = 1 Operation when PID
Lower Limit 0
ON Output is Negative
Pulse Input not 2
Upper Limit Fmax x109%
E5-00 = 2
OFF B5-10 is always 1 when b5-
Terminal A1 / A2 not 3 00 = 3/4
E3-01/07 = 9 PID輸入
( U4-02 )
Lower Limit Fmax x109%
0 PID Soft Starter
PID Feedback ( b5-16 )
I-limit
PID Block Diagram

Proportional Gain ( P ) ( b5-03 )

I-time ( I )
( b5-01 ) PID Delay Time
Pulse Input + ( b5-02 ) +
not 1 0 0 + 0 + 0 +
E5-00 = 1 P I b5-07 b5-09
- -1 1 1 + 1 + -1 1 +
Terminal A1 / A2
not 8 PID Output Gain
E3-01/07 = 8 PID Feedback PID Feedback 2 PID Input Limit PID Input Characteristic PID Output Upper/Lower
( U4-00 ) ( U4-05 ) Integral Hold PID Output Characteristic
( b5-21 ) ( E1-_ _= 50 ) Z-1 ( b5-05/b5-20 ) b5-06
( E1-_ _= 48 ) ( b5-08 )
0 or
( b5-08 ) Integral Reset
- + + PID Offset
not 10 ( E1-_ _= 47 )
Terminal A1 / A2 + 1 or 3
+ D
E3-01/07 = 10
PID control selection - 2 or 4 PID control selection
+ 2 or 4 ( b5-00 ) ( b5-00 )
PID Differential
D Z-1
Feedback
- 1 or 3 Derivative Time ( D )
( U4-04 )
Derivative Time ( D ) ( b5-04 )
Z-1 ( b5-04 )

■
 b5- 00 PID Control Setting

Enables or disables the PID function and selects the PID mode.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-00 PID Control Setting 0 to 4 0

0 : PID Control Disabled

1 : Output Frequency = PID Output 1

PID control is enabled. D (Derivative) control the deviation signal (U4-01: PID Input) between
the target and feedback as output frequency.

2 : Output Frequency = PID Output 2

PID control is enabled. D (Derivative) control the feedback signal (U4-05: PID Feedback 2) as
output frequency.

3 : Output Frequency = Frequency Command+ PID Output 1

PID control is enabled. D (Derivative) control the deviation signal (U4-01: PID Input) between
the target and feedback and add the frequency command as output frequency.

4 : Output Frequency = Frequency Command + PID Output 2

PID control is enabled. D (Derivative) control the feedback signal (U4-05: PID Feedback 2) and
add the frequency command as output frequency.

 b5- 01 Proportional Gain Setting (P)

Sets the P gain for PID input.

The larger the P gain is set, the smaller the deviation will be, and vice versa. However vibration
may occur if the value if set too high.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-01 Proportional Gain Setting (P) 0.00 to 25.00 1.00

 b5- 02 Integral Time Setting (I)

Deviation appears between PID target value and feedback value when using only proportional
control (P). Set integral time (I) to reduce the deviation,.
Sets the time to calculate the integral of the PID input. The shorter the integral time is set, the
faster the deviation will be eliminated, and vice versa. However vibration or overshoot may
occur if the value if set too high. I control is disabled when b5-02=0.00.
No. Name Setting Range Default

85
 b5-02 Integral Time Setting (I) 0.0 to 360.0 s 1.0 s

Deviation

Time

PID Control

D Control I Control
PID Input

P Control

Time
I Control Eliminates Deviation
PID PID
Feedback Feedback

Target Target
Deviation

Feedback Feedback

Time Time

Figure 6.18 Relationship between Time and Deviation

 b5- 03 Integral Time (I) Limit Setting

Sets the maximum output from the I (integral) control as a percentage of the maximum
frequency (d1-02)
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-03 Integral Time (I) Limit Setting 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0%
Note: During rapid load fluctuations, PID output may show vibration. Set a limit to suppress the vibration so as to
prevent the equipment damage or motor stall.

 b5- 04 Derivative Time (D)

Set this parameter when response improvement is needed.

Sets the time to predict the deviation based on the derivative of the PID input and PID
feedback.. The longer derivative time improves the response but may cause vibration as the
shorter derivative time suppress the overshoot but decrease the response. D control is
disabled when b5-04=0.00.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-04 Derivative Time (D) 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.00 s

86
 b5- 05 PID Output Limit

Sets the upper limit of output from PID control as a percentage of the maximum frequency.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-05 PID Output Limit 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0%

 b5- 06 PID Bias Voltage Adjustment

Sets the PID bias voltage adjustment as a percentage of the maximum frequency to add to the
PID control output.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-06 PID Bias Voltage Adjustment -100.0 to 100.0% 0.0%

 b5- 07 PID Primary Delay Time

Sets the delay time for the PID output filter. Change is normally not required.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-07 PID Primary Delay Time 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.00 s
Note: This parameter is effective to avoid the vibration when abrasion is high and rigidity is low. Increasing this
delay time could reduce the response of the drive.

 b5- 08 PID Output Reverse

Sets the reverse for the PID output and decision for the relationship between the target and
feedback
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-08 PID Output Reverse 0, 1 0

0 : Normal PID Output

A positive PID input causes an increase in the PID output.

1 : Reverse PID Output

A positive PID input causes an decrease in the PID output.

 b5- 09 PID Output Gain

Sets a gain to multiply by the PID output. The compensation will be more effective when
b5-00=3 or 4.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-09 PID Output Gain 0.00 to 25.00 1.00

 b5- 10 PID Output Reverse Selection

87
Determines whether or not a negative PID output reverses the drive rotating direction. setting
b5-10 = 1 mandatory when b5-00 =3 or 4
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-10 PID Output Reverse Selection 0, 1 0

0 : Reverse Disabled

Negative PID output will be limited to 0 and stop the drive.

1 : Reverse Enabled

The drive will run reversely if PID output is negative.

■ PID Feedback Low /High Detection

By setting b5-11 PID Feedback Low/High Detection, this detects whether the sensor or the
sensor wiring is broken. Always setting b5-11 this function during PID control so as to avoid
machinery accelerating to the maximum frequency and cause by PID feedback low / high.Or
the pump shut down applications cause by feedback overthe detection value

· PID Feedback Low

This will be detected when the value is lower than the set level for longer than the set time.

· PID Feedback High

This will be detected when the value is higher than the set level for longer than the set time.

The PID Feedback Low Detection operation is illustrated below. Same way applies to PID
Feedback High Detection.
PID Feedback Value

b5-12
PID Feedback Low
Detection Level

Time
No FbL
detection
Fbl Detection

b5-13 b5-13
PID Feedback Low PID Feedback Low
Detection Time Detection TIme

88
 Figure 6.19 PID Feedback Low Detection
Set b5-11 to b5-13 for PID Feedback Low Detection, and b5-11, b5-22, b5-23 for PID Feedback
High Detection.

 b5- 11 PID Feedback Low /High Detection Selection

Sets the feedback low /high detection and the operation when it is detected.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-11 PID Feedback Low /High Detection Selection 0 to 7 0

0 : Multi-Function Output Only

A multi-function output set for E2-□□= 40 (PID feedback low) will be triggered if the PID
feedback value is lower than the detection level set to b5-12 for longer than the detection time
set to b5-13
A multi-function output set for E2-□□= 41 (PID feedback high) will be triggered if the PID
feedback value is higher than the detection level set to b5-22 for longer than the detection
time set to b5-23
No alarm or fault will be triggered. The drive will continue operation. The output resets when
the PID feedback value returns to the normal range.

1 : Feedback Low /High Alarm

A FbL (PID feedback low) alarm and a multi-function output set for E2-□□= 40 (PID feedback
low) will be triggered if the PID feedback value is lower than the detection level set to b5-12
for longer than the detection time set to b5-13, the keypad
A FbH (PID feedback high) alarm and a multi-function output set for E2-□□= 41 (PID feedback
high) will be triggered if the PID feedback value is higher than the detection level set to b5-22
for longer than the detection time set to b5-23
A multi-function output set for E2-□□=13 (alarm) will be triggered in either event. The drive
will continue operation. The alarm resets when the PID feedback value returns to the normal
range.

2 : Feedback Low /High Fault

A FbL (PID feedback low) fault will be triggered if the PID feedback value is lower than the
detection level set to b5-12 for longer than the detection time set to b5-13, the keypad
A FbH (PID feedback high) fault will be triggered if the PID feedback value is higher than the
detection level set to b5-22 for longer than the detection time set to b5-23
A multi-function output set for E2-□□=11 ( fault) will be triggered in either event to cause the
drive to stop the motor.

3 : Multi-Function Output only, even if PID is Disabled

89
Same as b5-11= 0. Detection remains active when PID is disabled by a digital input (E1-□□=
46).

4 : Feedback Failure Alarm, ever if PID is Disabled

Same action as b5-11=1. Detection remains active when PID is disabled by a digital input

(E1-□□= 46).

5 : Feedback Failure Fault even if PID is Disabled

Same action as b5-11=2. Detection remains active when PID is disabled by a digital input
(E1-□□= 46).

6 ：Multi-Function Output, it continue to operate and light failure is not displayed

A feedback loss condition is detected when the PID feedback value falls below the value set in
parameter b5-12 (PID feedback loss detection level) for the time set in parameter b5-13 (PID
feedback loss detection time), E2- □□ = 40 terminal set is closed
A feedback loss condition is detected when the PID feedback value falls over the value set in
parameter b5-22 (PID feedback loss detection level) for the time set in parameter b5-23 (PID
feedback loss detection time), E2- □□ = 41 terminal set is closed
The invertor continues to operate. When the feedback value is not lost within the detection
range, the output will be reset.

7 ：Multi-Function Output Only (Detection of non-operation is still valid)

Function 7 with the function 0, the difference lies in the function 0 must detect valid in
operation, function 7 in the non-operation effectively

 b5- 12 PID Feedback Low Detection Level

Sets the PID feedback level used for detection. When the PID feedback falls below this level for
longer than the time set to b5-14, PID feedback loss will be detected.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-12 PID Feedback Low Detection Level 0 to 100% 0%

 b5- 13 PID Feedback Low Detection Time

Sets the PID feedback time used for detection. When the PID feedback falls below the level set
to b5-13 for longer than this time, PID feedback loss will be detected.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-13 PID Feedback Low Detection Time 0.0 to 25.5 s 1.0 s

90
 PID Sleep

PID Sleep operation is illustrated below.

PID Output

b5-14 PID Sleep

Start Level

b5-15 b5-15 Sleep Delay

Sleep Delay Time
Internal Run Time
Command
Run Stop
External Run
Command
Run Command Enabled
During Run
Continues to Output “During Run”

Figure 6.20 PID Sleep Operation

Notes for PID Sleep function

· The Stopping Method for PID Sleep function is determined by b1-02

· Set the PID Sleep function in b5-14 and b5-15.

 b5- 14 PID Sleep Start Level

Sets the frequency level used to trigger PID Sleep.

PID Sleep will be triggered when the PID output or frequency command falls below the level
set to b5-14 for the time longer than the time set to b5-15. The drive will resume operation
when the PID output or frequency command exceeds the level set to b5-14 for longer than the
time set in b5-15.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-14 PID Sleep Start Level 0.0 Hz to <1> 0.0 Hz
<1> The upper limit is determined by the values set to d1-02 (Maximum Output Frequency), d1-13 (Motor 2
Maximum Output Frequency) and L2-00 (Frequency Command Upper Limit).

 b5- 15 PID Sleep Delay Time

Sets the delay time used to activate/deactivate the PID Sleep function, If b5-15 is set to 0.0s,
the PID sleep function does not operate
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-15 PID Sleep Delay Time 0.0 to 25.5 s 0.0 s

 b5- 16 PID Acc./Dec. Time

91
The PID Acc. /Dec. time is used for the PID target.
When the PID target changes quickly, the normal C1-□□ Acc. time decreases the response
since it is applied after the PID output. This PID Acc./Dec. time prevents the overshoot,
undershoot and hunting caused by the decreased response. In addition, set a lower value to
parameter group C1 to avoid hunting. This parameter will be disabled if a multi-function input
is assigned to E1-□□= 49 (PID Soft-Start On/Off).
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-16 PID Acc./Dec. Time 0.0 to 20.0 s 0.0 s

 b5- 17 PID Target Selection

Enables or disables b5-18 for PID target.

No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-17 PID Target Selection 0, 1 0

0: PID Target Disabled

The value set to b5-18 is disabled.

1: PID Target Enabled

The value set to b5-18 is enabled.

 b5- 18 PID Target Value

When b5-17 = 1, if at the same time and no one analog input is set to PID target value, this
parameter is the PID target
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-18 PID Target Value 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00%

 b5- 19 PID Target Value Units

Sets the display units for b5-18, U4-00 ( PID Feedback) and U4-03 ( PID Target).
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-19 PID Target Value Units 0 to 3 1

0: Hz

Displays the PID target in 0.01 Hz units.

1: 0.01%

Displays the PID target as a percentage of maximum frequency.

2: r/min

92
Displays the PID target in r/min. Number of Motor Poles must be set

3: User Defined

Displays the PID target in the units defined by b5-24 and b5-25

 b5- 20 PID Output Lower Limit

Sets the minimum possible PID controller output as a percentage of the maximum output

frequency (d1-02). The lower limit is disabled when set to 0.00%

No. Name Setting Range Default

b5-20 PID Output Limit -100.0 ～ 100.0% 0.0%

 b5- 21 PID Input Limit

Sets the maximum allowed PID input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency
(d1-02). Parameter b5-21 acts as a bipolar limit.

No. Name Setting Range Default

b5-21 PID Input Limit 0.0 ～ 1000.0% 1000.0%

 b5- 22 PID Feedback High Detection Level

Sets the level for PID feedback high detection as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency.
PID feedback high will be detected when the feedback exceeds the level set in b5-22 for longer
than the time set in b5-23.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-22 PID Feedback High Detection Level 0 to 100% 100%

 b5- 23 PID Feedback High Detection Time

Sets the time for PID feedback high detection. PID feedback high will be detected when the
feedback exceeds the level set in b5-22 for longer than the time set in b5-23.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-23 PID Feedback High Detection Time 0 to 25.5 s 1.0 s

 b5- 24/b5- 25 PID Target Display Value/ PID Target Display Digits

When b5-19=3, b5-24 and b5-25 set a user-defined display for the PID feedback and target in
U4-00 and U4-03. When b5-19≠3, parameters b5-24 and b5-25 cannot be edited.
b5-24 Sets the display value when run at the maximum frequency.
93
b5-25 Sets the number of decimal places to display..
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-24 PID Target Display Value 1 to 60000 Determined by b5-19
b5-25 PID Target Display Digits 0 to 3 Determined by b5-19
0 ∶ No Decimal Places
1 ∶ 1 Decimal Place
2 ∶ 2 Decimal Places
3 ∶ 3 Decimal Places

PID Fine-Tuning
Follow the following instructions when the PID control parameters are set.

Overshoot Suppression
When an overshoot occurs, reduce the derivative time set to b5-04 and increase the integral
time set to b5-02.

Stability after Overshoot.

To immediately achieve stability after an overshoot, increase the derivative time set to b5-04
and reduce the integral time set to b5-02.

Long Cycle Oscillation Suppression

If the oscillation cycle is longer than the integral time set to b5-02, increase the time as the
integral operation is too strong.

Short Cycle Oscillation Suppression

If the oscillation cycle is almost the same as the derivative time set to b5-04, reduce the time as
the derivative operation is too strong.

If even 0.00 derivative time (D control disabled) cannot suppress the oscillation, reduce the P
Gain set to b5-01 or increase the PID Primary Delay Time set to b5-07.

 b5- 26 Frequency Reference Monitor Content During PID

Sets the content of the frequency reference monitor display (U4-08) when PID control is
active.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-26 Frequency Reference Monitor 0 、 1 0
Content During PID
0: Frequency Reference after PID
94
Monitor U4-08 displays the frequency reference increased or reduced for the PID output.
1: Frequency Reference
Monitor U4-08 displays the frequency reference value.

 b5- 27 PID Output Reverse Selection 2

Determines whether a negative PID output reverses the direction of drive operation. When the
PID function is used to trim the frequency reference (b5-00 = 3 or 4), this parameter has no
effect and the PID output will not be limited。
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-27 PID Output Reverse Selection 2 0 、 1 1
Note : Set in b1-03 for the stop reverse, set b5-27 is ignored
0: Reverse Disabled
Negative PID output will be limited to 0 and the drive output will be stopped.
1: Reverse Enabled
Negative PID output will cause the drive to run in the opposite direction.

 b5- 28 PID Disconnection Output Frequency

When a PID feedback disconnection alarm occurs(FbL), the drive will run at the frequency set
to b5-28, and return to PID control when disconnection alarm is reset.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b5-28 PID Disconnection Output Frequency 0.0 Hz to <1> 30.0 Hz
<1> The upper limit is determined by the values set to d1-02 (Maximum Output Frequency), d1-13 (Motor 2
Maximum Output Frequency) and L2-00 (Frequency Command Upper Limit).

b6 DWELL

The Dwell function temporarily holds the frequency command to prevent speed loss when
starting and stopping a heavy load. When driving a PM motor, the pause reduces the
oscillations during acceleration. The Dwell function is illustrated below.
Note: When using Dwell at stop, set b1-02 (Stopping Method Selection) to 0 (Ramp to Stop).

95
 Run OFF ON OFF
Command

Output b6-00 b6-02

Frequency
b6-01 b6-03

Figure 6.21 Dwell Function at Start and Stop

 b6- 00 / b6- 01 Dwell Frequency and time at Start

Sets the frequency to b6-00 used to be held for the time set in b6-01 during acceleration.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b6-00 Dwell Frequency at Start 0.0 Hz to <1> 0.0 Hz
b6-01 Dwell time at Start 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.0 s
<1> The upper limit is determined by the values set to d1-02 (Maximum Output Frequency), d1-13 (Motor 2
Maximum Output Frequency) and L2-00 (Frequency Command Upper Limit)

 b6- 02 / b6- 03 Dwell Frequency and time at Stop

Sets the frequency to b6-02 used to be held for the time set in b6-03 during deceleration.
No. Name Setting Range Default
b6-02 Dwell Frequency at Stop 0.0 to <1> 0.0 Hz
b6-03 Dwell time at Stop 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.0 s
<1> The upper limit is determined by the values set to d1-02 (Maximum Output Frequency), d1-13 (Motor 2
Maximum Output Frequency) and L2-00 (Frequency Command Upper Limit)

96
6.3 Group C, Tuning

C1 Acceleration and Deceleration Time

 C1- 00 to C1- 07 Acceleration and Deceleration Times 1 to 4

Four different acceleration and deceleration times can be set in the drive by multi-function
input terminals, motor selection or switched during run.

Set the acceleration time to determine the time needed to accelerate from 0Hz to the
maximum frequency (d1-02). Set the deceleration time to determine the time needed to
decelerate from the maximum frequency (d1-02) to 0Hz.

C1-00 and C1-01 are the active acceleration and deceleration times by default.

No. Name Setting Range Default

C1-00 Acceleration Time 1 0.0 to 6000.0 s <1> 10.0 s
C1-01 Deceleration Time 1
C1-02 Acceleration Time 2
C1-03 Deceleration Time 2
C1-04 Acceleration Time 3
(Acceleration Time 1 for Motor 2)
C1-05 Deceleration Time 3
(Deceleration Time 1 for Motor 2)
C1-06 Acceleration Time 4
(Acceleration Time 2 for Motor 2)
C1-07 Deceleration Time 4
(Deceleration Time 2 for Motor 2)
<1> The setting range of Acc./Dec is changed according to the setting of C1-09 (Acc./Dec. Time Unit Selection).
When C1-09 = 0 (0.01 second), then the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).

□ Switching Acceleration Times by Multi-Function Input

C1-00 and C1-01 are the active acceleration and deceleration times by default. Enable C1-02
to C1-07 by E1-□□ (Multi-Function Digital Inputs)= 16 (Acc./Dec. Time Selection 1) and
17(Acc./Dec. Time Selection 2). Refer to Table 6.9.
Table 6.9 Acc./Dec. Times Selection by Multi-Function Input
Acc./Dec. Time Selection 1 Acc./Dec Time Selection 2 Active Times
E1-□□= 16 E1-□□= 17 Acceleration Deceleration

97
 0 (Open) 0 (Open) C1-00 C1-01
1 (Closed) 0 (Open) C1-02 C1-03
0 (Open) 1 (Closed) C1-04 C1-05
1 (Closed) 1 (Closed) C1-06 C1-07

Figure 6.21 illustrates an operation example for changing acceleration and deceleration times. b1-02
(Stopping Method Selection) = 0 (Ramp to Stop).
C1-00 C1-01 C1-03 C1-05 C1-07
Dec. Time 1 C1-04 Dec. Time 4
Acc. Time 1 Dec. Time 2 Dec. Time 3
C1-02 Acc. Time 3 C1-06
Acc. Time 2 C1-01 Acc. Time 4 C1-01
Output Dec. Time 1 Dec. Time 1
Frequency

FWD/REV Run ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Command

ON OFF ON OFF
Acc./Dec. Time Selection 1
(Terminal S1 to S8, E1-□□ =16)

Acc./Dec. Time Selection 2 ON OFF

(Terminal S1 to S8, E1-□□ =17)

Figure 6.21 Operation of Acc./Dec. Time Change by Multi-Function Input

□ Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Times by Motor Selection

When setting E1-□□= 51 via a multi-function input, the motor can be switched between 1 and
2 by setting the input terminal On and Off. This function cannot be used for a PM motor.
When motor 1 is selected and E1-□□= 16 (Acc./Dec. Time Selection 1), the acceleration and
deceleration times can be switched between C1-00, C1-01 (Acc./Dec. Time 1) and C1-02, C1-03
(Acc./Dec. Time 2) for motor 1
When motor 2 is selected and E1-□□= 16 (Acc./Dec. Time Selection 1), the acceleration and
deceleration times can be switched between C1-04, C1-05 (Acc./Dec. Time 1 for Motor 2) and
C1-06, C1-07 (Acc./Dec. Time 2 for Motor 2). Refer to Table 6.10.

Table 6.10 Acc./Dec. Times Selection by Motor Selection

Acc./Dec. Time Selection 1 Motor 1 Selected Motor 2 Selected

E1-□□= 16 Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration Deceleration
Open C1-00 C1-01 C1-04 C1-05
Closed C1-02 C1-03 C1-06 C1-07

98
Note: Motor cannot be switched in a PM control method.

□ Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Times by a Frequency Level

The acceleration and deceleration times can be automatically switched by output frequency.
· When Acc./Dec. Time Switch Frequency C1-10 ≠ 0.0 and the frequency is below the
C1-10 level, the drive accelerates and decelerates according to C1-06 and C1-07 (Acc./Dec.
Time 4).
· When Acc./Dec. Time Switch Frequency C1-10 ≠ 0.0 and the frequency is above the
C1-10 level, the drive accelerates and decelerates according to C1-00 and C1-01 (Acc./Dec.
Time 1).
· When motor 2 is selected via a multi-function input and the frequency is below the C1-10
level, the drive accelerates and decelerates according to C1-06 and C1-07 (Acc./Dec. Time
2 for Motor 2).
· When motor 2 is selected via a multi-function input and the frequency is above the C1-10
level, the drive accelerates and decelerates according to C1-04 and C1-05 (Acc./Dec. Time
1 for Motor 2).
Refer to Figure 6.22.
Note: When set E1-□□= 16 (Acc./Dec. Time 1) and 17 (Acc./Dec. Time 2) via multi-function input, the acceleration
and deceleration times override the setting in C1-10. For example, when Acc./Dec. Time 2 is selected, even if the
output frequency exceeds the C1-10 level, the acceleration and deceleration times will not be changed.

Output Frequency

C1-10
Acc./Dec. Time
Switch Frequency

C1-06 C1-00 C1-01 C1-07

When the output frequency ≧ C1-10, drive follows C1-00, C1-01(Acc./Dec. Time 1)
When the output frequency < C1-10, drive follows C1-06, C1-07(Acc./Dec. Time 4)

Figure 6.22 Operation of Acc./Dec. Time Change by a Frequency Level

 C1- 08 Fast Stop Time

Sets the deceleration time when E1-□□= 21 (Fast Stop: Normal Open) or 22 (Fast Stop: Normal

99
Closed). The input terminal does not have to be closed continuously to trigger Fast Stop. It will
trigger Fast Stop even if the closure is momentary. Different from the normal deceleration, the
drive cannot be restarted after entering Fast Stop until completing deceleration, remove the
Fast Stop input and cycling the Run command.
If E2-□□ is set to 44 (During Fast Stop), this terminal will close during Fast Stop.
If Fast Stop is the action selected for a fault detection, the Fast Stop time set in this parameter
will be the deceleration time.
No. Name Setting Range Default
C1-08 Fast Stop Time 0.0 to 6000.0 s <1> 10.0 s
<1> The setting range is determined by the C1-09 (Acc./Dec. Time Unit Selection) setting. When C1-09 = 0, the
setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (second).
Note: A rapid deceleration will trigger an OVD fault and shut off the drive output causing the motor to coast. To
avoid the motor coasting and to ensure the motor stops safely, always set an appropriate time to this parameter.

 C1-09 Acc./Dec. Time Unit Selection

Set the time scaling for C1-00 to C1-08.

No. Name Setting Range Default
C1-09 Acc./Dec. Time Unit Selection 0, 1 1

0: 0. 01s

Sets the acceleration and deceleration times in 0.01 second units. The setting range will be
0.00 to 600.00 seconds. If 600.1 seconds or more is set to any parameter among C1-00 to
C1-08, C1-09 cannot be set to 0.

1: 0. 1s

Sets the acceleration and deceleration times in 0.1 second units. The setting range will be 0.00
to 6000.0 seconds.

 C1-10 Acc./Dec. Time Switch Frequency

Sets the frequency level. The drive will switch the acceleration and deceleration time at this
level.
No. Name Setting Range Default
C1-10 Acc./Dec. Time Switch Frequency 0.0 to <1><2> 0.0 Hz
<1> In control method of PM Closed-Loop Vector Control, the setting range is 0.0 to 100.0%,. The default setting is
0.0%.
<2> The upper limit is determined by the values set to d1-02 (Maximum Output Frequency), d1-13(Motor2
Maximum Output Frequency) and L2-00 (Frequency Command Upper Limit)

Note: This parameter will be disabled when 0.0 Hz (0.0％) is set to this parameter. <1> The setting range is
100
determined by the C1-09 (Acc./Dec. Time Unit Selection) setting. When C1-09 = 0, the setting range is 0.00 to
600.00 (second).

 C1-11/ C1-12 Jog Frequency Acc. / Dec. Time

C1-11 sets the acceleration time from 0Hz to the Jog frequency command (L1-16). And C1-12
sets the deceleration time from the Jog frequency command (L1-16) to 0Hz.
No. Name Setting Range Default
C1-11 Jog Frequency Acc. Time
0.0 to 6000.0 s <1> 10.0 s
C1-12 Jog Frequency Dec. Time
<1> The setting range changes depending on the C1-09 setting. When C1-09 = 0 (Units of 0.01s), the range will be
0.00s to 600.00s.

C2 S-Curve Characteristics

Sets the S-curve characteristics to reduce the shock to the machinery at start and stop. Sets the
S-curve characteristic time at the start and stop of acceleration and deceleration.

 C2- 00 to C2- 03 S-Curve Characteristic at Start/Stop of Acc./Dec.

Sets the S-curve characteristic time in C2-00 to C2-03.

No. Name Setting Range Default
C2-00 S-Curve Characteristic
at Acc. Start
C2-01 S-Curve Characteristic
at Acc. End
0.00 to 10.00 s 0.20 s
C2-02 S-Curve Characteristic
at Dec. Start
C2-03 S-Curve Characteristic
at Dec. End
S-curve characteristics are illustrated below.

101
 ON OFF
Forward

OFF ON
Reverse

C2-01 C2-02

Output C2-00 C2-03

Frequency
C2-00

C2-01 C2-02 C2-03

Figure 6.23 S-Curve Characteristics during Forward and Reverse

Setting the S-curve will increase the actual acceleration and deceleration times.
Actual acceleration time= acceleration time setting+(C2-00+C2-01) / 2
Actual deceleration time=deceleration time setting +(C2-02+C2-03) / 2

C3 Torque Compensation

The torque compensation is to enlarge the torque by increasing the output voltage when
larger load is applied. The drive detects the increased amount of the load by the output
current and adjusts the control with higher output voltage.
Note: Check if the motor parameters and the V/F pattern are set correctly before setting the torque compensation.

 C3-00 Torque Compensation Gain

Sets the gain for the motor 1 Torque compensation.

No. Name Setting Range Default

C3-00 Torque Compensation Gain 0.00 to 2.50 Determined by A1-02

□ Torque Compensation in Closed-Loop and Open-Loop V/F Control

The drive calculates the voltage loss on the output side using the output voltage and the
d2-04 (Motor Line-to-Line Resistance) value, and improves the torque when it is insufficient
during start or running at low speed.
Compensation voltage=Motor primary voltage loss x C3-00.

□ Torque Compensation in Open-Loop Vector Control, PM Open-Loop Vector Control

The motor excitation currents d-axis and q-axis are controlled separately. Torque
compensation affects q-axis current only.
Compensation voltage= q-axis voltage compensation (calculated by q-axis current) x C3-00

102
Adjustment:

Normally there is no need to change this parameter setting. However, adjust this setting by
scaling of 0.05 in the following situations.
· Increase the setting when using a long motor cable
· Decrease the setting when the motor oscillates
· During running at low speed, adjust C3-00 to keep the output current below the drive
rated current
Note:
· Do not change the setting in Open-Loop Vector Control as it will reduce the torque accuracy.
· Do not change the setting in PM Open-Loop Vector Control as an excessive setting value could cause
overcompensation and motor oscillation.

 C3- 02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time

Sets the Torque compensation primary delay time.

No. Name Setting Range Default
C3-02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 0 to 10000 ms Determined by A1-02

Adjustment:

Normally there is no need to change this parameter setting. However, adjust this setting by in
the following situations.
· Increase the setting when the motor oscillates
· Decrease the setting when the response is slow

C5 Slip Compensation

The heavier the load is at IM motors, the slower the motor speed is. The Slip Compensation
function can improve the speed accuracy in such situations.
Note: Check if the settings of d2-00 (Motor Rated Current), d2-01 (Motor Rated Slip) and d2-02 (Motor No-Load
Current) are correct before adjusting this parameter. It is automatically set by Auto-Tuning in Open-Loop Vector
Control.

 C5- 00 Slip Compensation Gain

Sets the slip compensation gain to improve the speed accuracy for heavy loads. Normally
there is no need to change this parameter. However, adjust the setting in the following
situations.
· Increase the setting if the motor speed is lower than the frequency command.

103
· Decrease the setting if the motor speed is higher than the frequency command.
No. Name Setting Range Default
C5-00 Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 to 2.5 Determined by A1-02
Note: When A1-02 = 0 (Open-Loop V/F Control), the default setting is 0.0. When A1-02 = 0 (Open-Loop Vector
Control), the default setting is 1.0.

 C5- 01 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time

Sets the slip compensation primary delay time to stabilize the motor speed or to improve the
speed response. Normally there is no need to change this parameter. However, adjust the
setting in the following situations.
· Decrease the setting if the slip compensation response is too slow.
· Increase the setting if the motor speed is unstable.
No. Name Setting Range Default
C5-01 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time 0 to 10000 ms Determined by A1-02
Note: When A1-02 = 0 (Open-Loop V/F Control), the default setting is 2.000 s. When A1-02 = 0 (Open-Loop Vector
Control), the default setting is 0.200 s.

 C5- 02 Slip Compensation Limit

Sets the maximum slip compensation as percentage of the rated slip for motor 1.
No. Name Setting Range Default
C5-02 Slip Compensation Limit 0 to 250% 200%
The slip compensation limit is constant within the constant torque range (frequency command
≤ d1-04). In the output range (frequency command ≥ d1-04), it is increased based on the
setting in this parameter and the output frequency as shown in the following figure.

d1-02
╳ C5-02
d1-04

C5-02

Output
Frequency
d1-04 d1-02
Base Frequency Maximum Output
Frequency
Figure 6.31 Slip Compensation Limit

104
C6 Carrier Frequency

 C6-00 Carrier Frequency Selection

Sets the switching frequency of the drive output transistors. Adjust this setting to reduce
audible noise and leakage current.
Note:
1. If this level is set higher than the default setting, the drive rated current will be decreased. Refer to Table 6.11 on
page 107.
2. The default setting is 2 in PM motor control, 8 (8kHz) in IM motor HD mode and 2 (2kHz) in IM motor ND mode.

No. Name Setting Range Default

C6-00 Carrier Frequency Selection 0 to 16 Determined by A1-02 and o2-03. Once
A1-06 is redefined, the default will be
changed accordingly

C6-00 Carrier Frequency C6-00 Carrier Frequency C6-00 Carrier Frequency

0 Determined by C6-01 6 6 kHz 12 12kHz
to C6-03
1 Retain 7 7 kHz 13 13 kHz
2 2 kHz 8 8 kHz 14 14kHz
3 3 kHz 9 9 kHz 15 15kHz
4 4 kHz 10 10 kHz 16 16kHz
5 5 kHz 11 11 kHz
Setting Carrier Frequency
Situation Solution
Speed and torque fluctuate at low speeds
The drive noise affects peripheral devices
Excessive leakage current from the drive Lower the carrier frequency
Cable connecting the drive and motor is too
long<1>
Loud noise from the motor Increase the carrier frequency <2>
<1> If the cable is too long, lower the carrier frequency according to the follow instructions.
<2> If ND mode is selected in A1-06, the default carrier frequency is 8kHz which is very close to the setting of 2kHz
The carrier frequency can be increased in ND mode. However the higher the setting is, the smaller the current will
be.

Cable Length Less than 50 m Less than 100 m More than 100 m
C6-00 2 to 16 ( excluding 16 kHz ) 2 to 5 2

105
Note: In PM Open-Loop Vector ControlP (A1-02=5), make sure the cable connecting the drive and motor is less
than 100 meters.

 C6-01/ C6-02/ C6-03 Maximum / Minimum Carrier Frequency / Carrier Frequency

Proportional Gain
Set 0 to parameter C6-00 to enable this setting. Sets the maximum and minimum carrier
frequency in V/F Control that the drive will adjust carrier frequency according to the output
frequency.
No. Name Setting Range Default
C6-01 Maximum Carrier Frequency 2.0 kHz to 15.0 kHz Determined by C6-00
C6-02 Minimum Carrier Frequency 2.0 kHz to 15.0 kHz
C6-03 Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain 0 to 99 <1>
<1> This setting is only enabled when C6-00=0.

□ Setting a Fixed Carrier Frequency

C6-01 can be adjusted within the setting range when C6-00 is set to 0.
Set the same value in C6-01 and C6-02 in control methods other than V/F Control.

□ Setting a Variable Carrier Frequency (Only for V/F Control)

In V/F Control, the carrier frequency can be set up to change linearly with the output frequency
by setting C6-01, C6-02 and C6-03 as shown in Figure 6.33.

Carrier Frequency

C6-01

Output Frequency
╳ C6-03

Output
d1-02 Frequency
Maximum Output Frequency

Figure 6.33 Carrier Frequency Changes Based on Output Frequency

Note:
1. When C6-03＞27 and C6-01＜ C6-02 , the carrier frequency will be fixed to the value set to C6-01.
2. When C6-03＜7, C6-02 is disabled and the carrier frequency will be fixed to the value set to C6-01.

 C7-00 Proportional Gain

106
This gain adjustment depending on the application field, if the load is heavy increase this value,
otherwise reduce this value
No. Name Setting Range Default

C7-00 Proportional Gain 0~100% Default:30%

6.4 Group L, Frequency Command

L1 Frequency Command

b1-00
Frequency Command
Source 1

=4
Pulse Train Input

=3
RS-485 Commnunication

=2
External I/O Terminal

Multi-Function 0
=1 Input
Terminal A1/A2
E1-00 = 4 Remote Multi-Step Speed
1 1
Local
L01-00 =0
Frequency Command 1
Auxiliary Frequency
Command E3-07=3


Terminal A2 Multi Step
b1-07 Speed 2
Frequency Command
L1-01
Source 2 E307 3 Multi Step
L1-02 Speed 3 E1-□□= 9
1Multi Step Open
=4 Frequency Speed 4
Pulse Train Input L1-03 Frequency
Command
Command
4~16
1Multi Step
=3 Speed 15 Closed
RS-485 Commnunication
L1-14
Multi-Step
Speed 16
=2 L1-15
External I/O Terminal
Job Jog Command
Command L1-16
=1 Multi-Step Speed
Terminal A1/A2 Command

L01-00 =0
Frequency Command 1

Figure 6.34 Frequency Command Diagram

 L1-00 to L1-16 Frequency Command 1 to 16 and Jog Frequency Command

The drive allows the user to switch between up to 16 frequency commands and 1 Jog
frequency command. The drive uses the selected acceleration and deceleration times when
switching between each frequency command.
The Job frequency command overrides frequency command 1 to 16.
No. Name Setting Range Default

107
 L1-00 to L1-15 Frequency Command 0.00Hz to <1> L1-00 5.00Hz
1 to 16 <2> <3> L1-01 8.00Hz
L1-02 10.00Hz
L1-03 12.00Hz
L1-04 15.00Hz
L1-05 20.00Hz
L1-06 25.00Hz
L1-07 30.00H7
L1-08 35.00Hz
L1-09 40.00Hz
L1-10 42.00Hz
L1-11 45.00Hz
L1-12 50.00Hz
L1-13 50.00Hz
L1-14 50.00Hz
L1-15 50.00Hz
L1-16 Jog Frequency 0.00Hz to <1> 6.00 Hz <2>
Command <2> <3>
<1> The upper limit is determined by d1-02 (Maximum Output Frequency) and L2-00 (Frequency Command Upper
Limit).
<2> If L2-00 (Frequency Upper Limit) is adjusted, the excessive frequency in L1-00 to L1-15 will be automatically
set to the upper limit determined in L2-00.

□ Setting Multi-Step Speed

To assign a multi-step speed command to a multi-function input, set E1-□□= 5, 6, 7, 8

(Multi-Step Speed 1, 2, 3, 4). To assign the Jog frequency command to a multi-function input,
set E1-□□ =9.
Table 6.12 Multi-Step Speed Command and Multi-Function Terminal Combinations

Multi-Step Multi-Step Multi-Step Multi-Step Multi-Step

Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed
Frequency Command
Command 1 Command 2 Command 3 Command 4 Command 5
E1-□□=5 E1-□□=6 E1-□□=7 E1-□□=8 E1-□□=9
Frequency Command 1
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
( L1-00: set in b1-00)
Frequency Command 2
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
L1-01
Frequency Command 3
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
L1-02
Frequency Command 4 ON ON OFF OFF OFF

108
 L1-03
Frequency Command 5
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
L1-04
Frequency Command 6
ON OFF ON OFF OFF
L1-05
Frequency Command 7
OFF ON ON OFF OFF
L1-06
Frequency Command 8
ON ON ON OFF OFF
L1-07
Frequency Command 9
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
L1-08
Frequency Command 10
ON OFF OFF ON OFF
L1-09
Frequency Command 11
OFF ON OFF ON OFF
L1-10
Frequency Command 12
ON ON OFF ON OFF
L1-11
Frequency Command 13
OFF OFF ON ON OFF
L1-12
Frequency Command 14
ON OFF ON ON OFF
L1-13
Frequency Command 15
OFF ON ON ON OFF
L1-14
Frequency Command 16
ON ON ON ON OFF
L1-15
Jog Frequency Command
- - - - ON
L1-16 <1>
<1> The Job frequency command overrides frequency command 1 to 16.

109
 Frequency Command L1-15

L1-14

L1-13

L1-08

L1-07

L1-06

L1-05

L1-04

L1-03

L1-02

L1-01

L1-00 L1-16

Time

Run/Stop Forward
( Reverse)

Multi-Step Speed ON ON ON ON ON ON
Command 1

Multi-Step Speed
ON ON ON
Command 2
ON ON
Multi-Step Speed
Command 3
Multi-Step Speed ON
Command 4

Multi-Step Speed
ON
Command 5

Figure 6.35 Jog Frequency Command Operation

L2 Frequency Upper / Lower Limit

Sets the upper and lower limits to make sure the motor runs in the range set to prevent
resonance or machinery damage.

 L2-00 Frequency Command Upper Limit

Sets the upper limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. Even if a frequency
command higher than this level is entered, the drive will run at the limit set to this parameter.
No. Name Setting Range Default
L2-00 Frequency Command Upper Limit 0.0 to 110.0 % 100.0 %

 L2-01 Frequency Command Lower Limit

Sets the lower limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. Even if a frequency
command lower than this level is entered, the drive will run at the limit set to this parameter.
No. Name Setting Range Default
L2-01 Frequency Command Lower Limit 0.0 to 110.0% 0.0%
110
 Output
Frequency

Frequency Command
L2-00
Upper Limit

Operating
Range

Frequency Command
L2-01 Lower Limit

Frequency
Command
Figure 6.36 Frequency Command Upper and Lower Limits

L3 Jump Frequency

 L3-00 to L3-03 Jump Frequency 1 to 3 / Jump Frequency Range

Sets the Jump frequency range to avoid operation at the speed causing resonance in the
machinery. If the frequency command falls within a Jump frequency range, the drive will hold
the frequency command at the upper limit of the range until accelerating past this range when
the frequency command rises above that upper limit.
Sets L3-00 to L3-02 to 0.0 Hz to disable Jump frequency.
No. Name Setting Range Default
L3-00 Jump Frequency 1 0.0 Hz to <1> 0.0 Hz <2>
L3-01 Jump Frequency 2
L3-02 Jump Frequency 3
L3-03 Jump Frequency Range 0.0 to d1-02 <3> 1.0 Hz <3>
<1> The upper limit is determined by the values set to d1-02 (Maximum Output Frequency), d1-13 (Motor 2
Maximum Output Frequency) and L2-00 (Frequency Command Upper Limit).
<2> In PM Closed-Loop Vector Control, the setting range is 0.0 to 100.0% and the default setting is 0.0% .
<3> In PM Closed-Loop Vector Control, the setting range is 0.0 to 40.0% and the default setting is 1.0% .

The relationship between the output frequency and the Jump frequency is illustrated in the

following figure.

111
 Output
Frequency

Frequency
Frequency command
Command increases
Decreases
L3-04
Jump Frequency
Range

L3-04
Jump Frequency
Range

L3-04
Jump Frequency
Range
L3-00 L3-01 L3-02 Frequency
Jump Frequency 1 Jump Frequency 2 Jump Frequency 3 Command

Figure 6.37 Jump Frequency Operation

Note:
1. The drive will not run at the frequency command or automatically change the frequency command within the
Jump frequency range. The drive will smoothly run according to the acceleration and deceleration times C1-00 and
C1-01.

2. When setting more than one Jump frequency, make sure L3-00 ≦ L3-01 ≦ L3-02.

L4 Up/ Down 1, Up/ Down 2 and Frequency Command Hold

 L4-00 Up/ Down Frequency Command Hold

This parameter is enabled in either of the following conditions.

· E1-□□= 10/11 (Up/Down Command)
· E1-□□= 12/13 (Up/Down 2 Command)
Determines whether or not to save the frequency command or the frequency bias (Up/Down 2)
value when the Stop command is entered or the power supply is shut off.
No. Name Setting Range Default
L4-00 Up/ Down Frequency Command Hold 0, 1, 2 0

0 ：Clear Up/ Down Frequency Command at Stop

UP/DOWN commands via multi-function input terminals are enabled to adjust the speed only
112
when the drive is running. The frequency command will be reset to 0 Hz when the Stop
command is entered or the drive power supply is shut off.

1 ：Save Up/ Down Frequency Command at Stop

UP/DOWN commands via multi-function input terminals are enabled to adjust the speed only
when the drive is running. The frequency command will be saved to L4-03 when the Stop
command is entered. The drive will follow the saved frequency command when restart. To
reset the saved frequency command to 0, enter UP or Down before giving any Run command.

2 ：Accept Up/ Down Frequency Command at Stop

UP/DOWN commands via multi-function input terminals are enabled to adjust the speed even
when the drive is not running. The frequency command will be saved to L4-03 when the Stop
command is entered. The drive will follow the saved frequency command when restart.

 L4-01 Frequency Command Bias ( Up 2 / Down 2)

Sets the bias used to add to or subtract from the frequency command by Up/Down 2.
No. Name Setting Range Default
L4-01 Frequency Command Bias ( Up 2 / Down 2) 0.00 to 99.99 Hz 0.00 Hz
The operation is determined by the set value.

Setting L4-01=0. 00 Hz

When the Up 2 or Down 2 command is enabled, the bias value is increased or decreased using
the acceleration and deceleration times defined by L4-02 (Frequency Command Acc./Dec
Setting) and the acceleration and deceleration times se in C1-00 to C1-07 will be overridden.

113
 Output
frequency

Bias value is increased

using the acc./dec.times
set to L4-02
Bias

Up 2
command
Figure 6.38 Up 2/Down 2 Bias when L4-01=0.0 Hz

Setting L4-01 ≠ 0.00 Hz

If the Up 2 or Down 2 command is closed for less than 2 seconds, the bias is increased or
decreased using the acceleration and deceleration times defined by L4-01 (Frequency Command
Bias). If the Up 2 or Down 2 command is closed for more than 2 seconds, the bias is increased
or decreased using the acceleration and deceleration times as Up 1/ Down 1. The frequency
command changes with the acceleration and deceleration times defined by L4-02 (Frequency
Command Acc./Dec Setting).

114
 Output
frequency

Bias value is increased in steps as

defined in d4-02
Drive uses accel/decel times as
set in d4-02
Bias

Up 2
command

Less Less More

than 2s than 2s than 2s

Figure 6.39 Up 2/Down 2 Bias when L4-01＞0.0 Hz

 L4-02 Frequency Command Acc./Dec Setting ( Up / Down 2)

Sets the acceleration/deceleration times to increase or decrease the frequency command bias
for Up/Down 2.
No. Name Setting Default
Range
L4-02 Frequency Command Acc./Dec Setting ( Up2 / Down 2) 0, 1 0

0 : Current Acc./Dec. Time

The drive uses the currently active acceleration or deceleration time.

1 : Acc./Dec. Time 4

The drive uses the C1-06 (Acceleration Time 4) and C1-07 (Deceleration Time 4).

 L4-03 Up/Down Frequency Command Save

No. Name Setting Range Default

L4-03 Up/Down Frequency Command Save 0.00 to <1> 0.00 Hz
<1> The upper limit is determined by the values set to d1-02 (Maximum Output Frequency), d1-13 (Motor 2
Maximum Output Frequency) and L2-00 (Frequency Command Upper Limit).

115
Saves the frequency command from Up/Down 1 or Up/Down 2. Up/Down 1 and Up/Down 2
cannot be used at the same time. If a multi-function input terminal is assigned to Up/Down 1
and Up/Down 2, an alarm will be triggered.
This parameter is enabled in the following situations.
1. b1-00 (Frequency Command Selection 1) or b1-07 (Frequency Command Selection 2)=2
(Terminal Up/ Down)

2. E1-□□= 10/11 ( Up/Down Command) or E1-□□= 12/13 ( Up/Down 2 Command)

3. L4-00 (Frequency Command Hold)= 1 or 2 (Enabled)

The Up/Down Frequency Command Save can also be given when a Stop command is entered.

 L4-04 Frequency Command Hold

This parameter is enabled when any multi-function terminal is assigned to E1-□ □= 18

(Acc./Dec. Ramp Hold)
Determines whether or not to save the frequency command when the Stop command is
entered or the power supply is shut off.
No. Name Setting Range Default
L4-04 Frequency Command Hold 0, 1 0

0 : Disabled

The frequency command will be reset to 0 Hz when the Stop command is entered or the drive
power supply is shut off. The active frequency command will be the drive uses when the drive
restarts.

1 : Enabled

The frequency command will be saved when the Run command is removed, and remain active
when the drive restarts. However if the input terminal assigned to E1-□□= 18 is open when
applying the power supply, the saved frequency command will be reset to 0 Hz.

116
 Power ON
supply
OFF

Forward
OFF ON OFF ON
Run/ Stop

Hold
OFF ON OFF ON
Acc./Dec.

Frequency
Command

Output
Frequency L4-01 = 1

L4-01 = 0
Hold Hold

Figure 6.40 Frequency Command Hold with Acc./Dec. Hold

· Up/Down and Up/Down 2
The frequency command will be saved when the Run command is removed, and remain active
when the drive restarts. To reset the saved frequency command to 0 Hz, enter UP or DOWN
before entering a Run command.

L6 Offset Frequency

 L6- 00 to L6- 02 Offset Frequency 1 to 3

Sets the offset value as a percentage of the maximum output frequency to add to or subtract
from the frequency command. Select the offset frequency in E1-□□= 53, 54 and 55 (Offset
Frequency 1 to 3). The offset frequency will not add up being minus value and run in a reverse
direction as it is limited by the upper and lower limit.
No. Name Setting Range Default
L6-00 Offset Frequency 1 -100.0 to 100.0% 0.0%
L6-01 Offset Frequency 2 -100.0 to 100.0% 0.0%
L6-02 Offset Frequency 3 -100.0 to 100.0% 0.0%

117
Frequency + Frequency
Soft-start
command + command
after soft-start

Multi-function input E1-□□ = 53 = ON

L6-01 Offset +
Frequency 1 +
(Signed)

Multi-function input E1-□□ = 54 = ON

L6-02 Offset +
Frequency 2 +
(Signed)

Multi-function input E1-□□ = 55 = ON

L6-03 Offset
Frequency 3
(Signed)

Figure 6.41 Offset Frequency Operation

118
6.5 Group d, Motor Parameters

d parameters set the V/F characteristics and motor parameters.

d1 V/F Characteristics

 d1- 00 Input Voltage Setting

Sets this parameter to match the input voltage of the drive as the base for detections such as
ov (Overvoltage) and Uv (Undervoltage).
Notice: To ensure the drive protection functions work properly, a lways set the input voltage of the drive (not
motor) to this parameter. Failure to comply could cause damage to the machinery or injury to personnel.
No. Name Setting Range Default
d1-00<1> Input Voltage Setting 155 to 255 V <1> 230 V <1>
<1> This is for a 200 V AC drive. The value is doubled for a 400 V AC drive.
□ Values Related to Drive Input Voltage

The following detection levels are determined by the drive input voltage.
Approximate Values
P3-04
d1-00 ov P7-13 P2-03 P2-08
Voltage (Stall Prevention
setting Detection (DC Braking (Detection (Voltage Target
Level during
Level Level) <1> Level) During KEB)
Deceleration)
200 V All settings 410 V 395 V 190 V 260 V 395
Setting ≥
820 V 790 V 380 V 500 V 790
400 V
400 V
Setting＜
820 V 790 V 350 V 460 V 790
400 V
<1> The braking transistor operation level.

■ V/F Pattern Setting( d1-01)

The set V/F pattern determines the output voltage according to the frequency command.
There are 15 different preset V/F patterns (setting 0 to E: only the maximum voltage and base
voltage can be changed) and user-defined V/F patterns d1-02 to d1-11 (setting F).

 d1- 01 V/F Pattern Selection

Selects 1 V/F pattern from the preset 15 ones or sets the user-defined V/F pattern.
No. Name Setting Range Default

119
 d1-01 V/F Pattern Selection 0 to 9, A to F <1> F <2>
<1> This will not be reset by A1-03 (Reset).
<2> In Vector Control, d1-01 =F.

□ Preset V/F Pattern Selection (Setting Value 0 to E)

The preset V/F patterns are listed in Table 6.13. Select the appropriate V/F pattern and set to
this parameter. d1-02 to d1-11 cannot be edited.
Note:
1. An improper V/F could cause motor undertorque or increased current because of overexcitation.
2. d1-01 will not be reset by A1-03 (Reset).

Table 6.13 V/F Pattern Selection

Setting
Selections Characteristic Applications
Value
0 50 Hz Constant For general purpose applications such as
1 60 Hz Torque conveyors. The torque remains constant
2 60 Hz (with 50 Hz base) regardless of the speed.
3 72 Hz (with 60 Hz base)
4 50 Hz, cube of derate Derated For applications such as fans, pumps and
5 50 Hz, square of derate Torque other derated loads.
6 60 Hz, cube of derate
7 60 Hz, square of derate

8 50 Hz, mid starting torque High Starting · Long wiring between the drive and motor
Torque (more than 150 m)
9 50 Hz, high starting torque · Large starting torque is required such as

A 60 Hz, mid starting torque elevators.

· AC reactor is installed on the drive output
B 60 Hz, high starting torque side
C 90 Hz (with 60 Hz base) Fixed Output Constant output voltage when running at
D 120 Hz (with 60 Hz base) 60 Hz and above.
E 180 Hz (with 60 Hz base)

The characteristics of the V/F patterns are illustrated in the following table. The table shows the
V/F patterns for 200V. The voltage will be doubled for 400V.

120
 Table 6.14 Constant Torque Characteristics (Setting 0 to 3)

Setting = 0 50 Hz Setting =1 60 Hz Setting =2 60 Hz Setting =3 72 Hz

230 230 230 230

V V V V

14 14 14 14
7 7 7 7

0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3 60 0 1.3 2.5 50 60 0 1.5 3 60 72

Hz Hz Hz Hz

Table 6.15 Derated Torque Characteristics (Setting 4 to 7)

Setting =4 50 Hz Setting =5 50 Hz Setting =6 60 Hz Setting =7 60 Hz

230 230 230 230

V V V V
50
50 35
35
8 9 8 9

0 1.3 25 50 0 1.3 25 50 0 1.3 30 60 0 1.5 30 60

Hz Hz Hz Hz

Table 6.16 High Starting Torque Characteristics (Setting 8 to B)

Setting =8 50 Hz Setting =9 50 Hz Setting =A 60 Hz Setting =B 60 Hz
230 230 230 230

V V V V
23
23 18
18
9 11 9 11

0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.3 2.5 50 0 1.5 3.0 60 0 1.5 3 60

Hz Hz Hz Hz

Table 6.17 Fixed Output Characteristics (Setting C to F)

Setting =C 90 Hz Setting =D 120 Hz Setting =E 180 Hz
230 230 230

V V V

14 14 14
7 7 7

0 1.5 3 60 90 0 1.5 3 60 120 0 1.5 3 60 180

Hz Hz Hz

User-Defined V/F Patterns (Default : F)

When d1-01 = F, d1-02 to d1-11 can be set to create a new pattern. d1-02 to d1-11 will be
same as V/F pattern setting 1 after reset.
121
■ V/F Pattern Settings d1- 02 to d1- 11

When d1-01 ≤ E, the user can use d1-02 to d1-11 to monitor the V/F pattern settings. When
d1-01 = F, d1-02 to d1-11 can be set to create a new pattern as shown in Figure 6.42.
No. Name Setting Range Default
d1-02 Maximum Output Frequency 25.0 to 400.0 Hz <1>

d1-03 Maximum Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> <1> <2>

d1-04 Base Frequency 0.0 to d1-02 <1>

d1-05 Base Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> 0.0 V <2> <3>

d1-06 Middle Output Frequency 0.0 to d1-02 <1>

d1-07 Middle Output Frequency 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> <1> <2>

Voltage
d1-08 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 to d1-02 <1>

d1-09 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> <1> <2>

Voltage
d1-10 Middle Output Frequency 2 0.0 to d1-02 0.0 Hz <4>
d1-11 Middle Output Frequency 0.0 to 255.0 V <3> 0.0 V <2> <3>
Voltage 2 <4>
<1> The default setting is determined by A1-02 (Control Method Selection). The settings in this table are the
default in Open-Loop V/F Control.
<2>This is the value for a 200 V AC drive. The value for a 400 V AC drive is doubled.
<3>This will be automatically changed in Auto-Tuning (rotational, stationary 1 or 2).
<4> d1-10 and d1-11 will be disabled when setting 0.0.

Output Voltage (V)

d1-03
d1-11

d1-05

d1-07

d1-09

d1-08 d1-06 d1-04 d1-10 d1-02

Frequency (Hz)

Figure 6.42 V/F Pattern

122
Note: When setting an user-defined V/F pattern, make sure d1-08 ≤ d1-06 < d1-04 ≤ d1-10 ≤ d1-02.

V/F Characteristics for Motor 2

Use d1-13 to d1-22 to set the V/F pattern for motor 2. Refer to 51 for setting multi-function
input terminal when switching motor parameters.
If an multi-function input terminal assigned to E1-□□= 51 switches to motor 2, and A1-02 is set
to 5, 6 or 7, the oPE06 fault will be triggered.

d2 Motor Parameters

d2 parameters set the important motor information required to perform optimum motor
control. In open-loop control methods, the motor parameters will be set automatically during
Auto-Tuning. If Auto-Tuning cannot be performed properly, set the parameters manually.

■ Motor 1 Parameters

 d2- 00 Motor Rated Current

Sets the motor rated current according to the motor nameplate. This value determines the
motor protection for torque and will be set automatically during Auto-Tuning.
No. Name Setting Range Default
d2-00 Motor Rated Current 10 to 200% of drive rated Determined by o2-03,
current A1-06
Note:
1. If the maximum motor capacity the drive can run is less than 11kW, it will be displayed in units of 0.1A. The
maximum motor capacity the drive can run is determined by A1-06 (ND/HD Mode). Refer to Ch 2.4 on page 15
2. If the d2-00 (Motor Rated Current) setting is lower than the d2-02 (Motor No-Load Current) setting, an oPE02
(Parameter Range Setting Error) error will be triggered . Therefore properly set d2-02.

 d2- 01 Motor Rated Slip

Sets the motor rated slip. This value determines the slip compensation and will be set
automatically during Auto-Tuning.
No. Name Setting Range Default
d2-01 Motor Rated Slip 0.00 to 60000 Determined by o2-03,
A1-06

If Auto-Tuning cannot be performed, use the information shown on the motor nameplate to
calculate the motor rated slip by the following formula.
d2-01=f-(n‧p)/120
f ∶rated frequency (Hz), n ∶ motor rated speed ( min-1), p ∶ number of motor poles

123
 d2- 02 Motor No-Load Current

Sets the motor no-load current when running at no-load voltage and rated frequency. This will
be set automatically during Auto-Tuning. This can also be set according to the no-load current
listed on the motor test report. Contact the motor manufacturer for a test report.
No. Name Setting Range Default
d2-02 Motor No-Load Current 0.0 A to [d2-00] A Determined by o2-03,
( exclude d2-00) A1-06
Note: If the maximum motor capacity the drive can run is less than 11kW, it will be displayed in units of 0.1A. The
maximum motor capacity the drive can run is determined by A1-06 (ND/HD Mode). Refer to Ch 2.4 on page 15？.

 d2- 03 Number of Motor Poles

Sets the number of motor poles. This will be set automatically during Auto-Tuning.

No. Name Setting Range Default

d2-03 Number of Motor Poles 2 to 48 4

 d2- 04 Motor Line-to-Line Resistance

Sets the line-to-line resistance. This will be set automatically during Auto-Tuning. Do not mix
motor line-to-line resistance with resistance for PM motors.
If Auto-Tuning cannot be performed, contact the motor manufacturer for the test report. Use
the line-to-line resistance listed in the rest report to calculate the line-to-line resistance by the
following formula.
· E-type insulation: the resistance value (Ω) listed on the test report at 75°C × 0.92
· B-type insulation: the resistance value (Ω) listed on the test report at 75°C × 0.92
· F-type insulation: the resistance value (Ω) listed on the test report at 115°C × 0.87
No. Name Setting Range Default
0.000 to 65.000 Ω Determined by o2-03,
d2-04 Motor Line-to-Line Resistance
<1> A1-06

 d2- 05 Motor Leakage Inductance

Sets the voltage drop caused by the motor leakage inductance relative to the motor rated
frequency and current. This will be set automatically during Auto-Tuning.
No. Name Setting Range Default
Determined by o2-03,
d2-05 Motor Leakage Inductance 0.00 to 650.00 mH
A1-06

 d2- 06 Motor Rotor Resistance

124
Sets the motor rotor resistance. This will be set automatically during Auto-Tuning.
No. Name Setting Range Default
0.000 to 65.000 Ω Determined by o2-03,
d2-06 Motor Rotor Resistance
<1> A1-06

 d2- 07 Motor Mutual Inductance

Sets the motor mutual inductance. This will be set automatically during Auto-Tuning.
No. Name Setting Range Default
Determined by o2-03,
d2-07 Motor Mutual Inductance 0.0 to 6500.0 mH
A1-06

 d2- 08 Retain

 d2- 09 Retain

 d2- 10 Motor Rated Capacity

Sets the motor rated capacity in units of 0.01kW. This will be set automatically during
Auto-Tuning.
No. Name Setting Range Default
d2-10 Motor Rated Capacity 0.00 to 650.00 kW Determined by o2-03
Note: If the maximum motor capacity the drive can run is less than 300kW, it will be displayed in units of 0.01kW. If
the maximum motor capacity the drive can run is more than 300kW, it will be displayed in units of 0.1kW.The
maximum motor capacity the drive can run is determined by A1-06 (ND/HD Mode). Refer to Ch 2.4 on page 15？.

■ Motor Parameters Manual Setting

Use the information listed on the motor test report and follow the instructions below.

□ Motor Rated Current Setting

Enter the rated current written on the motor nameplate to d2-00.

□ Motor Rated Slip Setting

Use the rated speed written on the motor nameplate to calculate the motor rated slip and set
to d2-01.
Motor rated slip = motor rated frequency [Hz]- rated speed ( min-1)×number of motor poles /
120

□ Motor No-Load Current Setting

Sets the motor no-load current when running at no-load voltage and rated frequency. This
125
information is not written on the motor nameplate. Contact the motor manufacturer for the
information.

□ Number of Motor Poles Setting

d2-03 is only enabled in Closed-Loop V/F Control and Closed-Loop Vector Control. Enter the
number of motor poles written on the motor nameplate.

□ Motor Line-To-Line Resistance Setting

d2-04 will be set automatically during Auto-Tuning. However if Auto-Tuning cannot be

performed, contact the motor manufacturer for the test report. Use the line-to-line resistance
listed in the rest report to calculate the line-to-line resistance by the following formula.
· E-type insulation: the resistance value (Ω) listed on the test report at 75°C × 0.92
· B-type insulation: the resistance value (Ω) listed on the test report at 75°C × 0.92
· F-type insulation: the resistance value (Ω) listed on the test report at 115°C × 0.87

□ Motor Leakage Inductance Setting

d2-05 will be set automatically during Auto-Tuning.

□ Motor Rotor Resistance and Mutual Inductance Setting

d2-06 and d2-07 will be set automatically during rotational Auto-Tuning.

□ Set the Motor Mechanical Loss

126
6.6 Group E, Multi-Function Terminals

E1 Multi-Function Digital Inputs

 E1- 00 to E1- 07 Terminal S1 to S7 Function Selection

Assigns functions to multi-function terminals S1 to S7. Set this parameter according to Table
6.18.
No. Name Setting Range Default
E1-00 Terminal S1 Function
0～74 / 100~174 0 : 2-Wire Sequence Control (Forward/Stop)
Selection
E1-01 Terminal S2 Function
0～74 / 100~174 1: 2-Wire Sequence Control (Forward/Stop)
Selection
E1-02 Terminal S3 Function
0～74 / 100~174 23 : External Fault
Selection
E1-03 Terminal S4 Function
0～74 / 100~174 39: Fault Reset
Selection
E1-04 Terminal S5 Function
0～74 / 100~174 5: Multi-Step Speed Command 1
Selection
E1-05 Terminal S6 Function
0～74 / 100~174 6: Multi-Step Speed Command 2
Selection
E1-06 Terminal S7 Function
0～74 / 100~174 9: Jog Frequency
Selection
Note1. Digital input terminals if necessary reverse input function, parameter settings can be selected for
its hundreds digit 1 can be realized
EX: Forward / stop selection for the N、C mode, the parameter can be set to 100.
Note2. Parameters option contains 2、23 to 38,select N、C modes
Table 6.18
Setting Functions Setting Functions
0 2-Wire Sequence Control 41 Multi-Function Analog Input Selection
(Forward/Stop) (Terminal A1 and A2)
1 2-Wire Sequence Control
42 Retain
(Reverse/Stop)
2 3-Wire Sequence 43 Retain
3 Local/Remote Selection 44 Retain
4 Command Source 1/2 Selection 45 Communication Mode
5 Multi-Step Speed Command 1 46 PID Disable
6 Multi-Step Speed Command 2 47 PID Integral Reset
127
 7 Multi-Step Speed Command 3 48 PID Integral Hold
8 Multi-Step Speed Command 4 49 PID Soft-Start On/Off
9 Jog Frequency 50 PID Input Characteristics Switch
10 Up Command 51 Retain
11 Down Command 52 Timer Input
12 Up2 Command 53 Offset Frequency 1
13 Down2 Command 54 Offset Frequency 2
14 FJOG Command 55 Offset Frequency 3
15 RJOG Command 56 Retain
16 Acc./Dec. Time Selection 1 57 KEB Command 1 (Normal Open)
17 Acc./Dec. Time Selection 2 58 Retain
18 Acc./Dec. Ramp Hold 59 Retain
19 Baseblock Command 60 Program Lockout
20 Retain 61 Analog Frequency Command Hold
21 Fast Stop 62 Retain
22 Retain 63 External Speed Search Command
23 External Fault 1 64 Retain
24 External Fault 2 65 DC Braking
25 External Fault 3 66 Retain
26 External Fault 4 67 Retain
27 External Fault 5 68 Retain
28 External Fault 6 69 Drive Enabled
29 External Fault 7 70 Retain
30 External Fault 8 71 Retain
31 External Fault 9 72 Retain
32 External Fault 10 73 Retain
33 External Fault 11 74 S7 is set to pulse input or PWM
34 External Fault 12
35 External Fault 13
36 External Fault 14
37 External Fault 15
38 External Fault 16
39 Fault Reset
40 oH2 (AC drive Overheat Alarm)

0 : Forward/ Stop

1 : Reverse/ Stop
128
2 : 3-Wire Sequence Control

The multi-function input terminal S3 to S7 can be assigned to 3-Wire Sequence Control to be

the input terminal for Forward/ Reverse Command. And terminals S1 and S2 will be
automatically assigned to Run and Stop command separately.
When terminal S1 (Run command) closes for longer than 2ms, the drive runs the motor. When
terminal S2 (Stop command) opens for even an instant, the drive stops the motor. When the
input terminal assigned to 3-wire sequence control opens, the drive runs in forward direction,
and when it is closed, the drive runs in reverse direction.
AV Drive
Stop Switch Run Switch
(Normal Closed)) (Normal Open)
S1
Run command (Runs when closed)
S2
Stop command (Stops when open)
S5
FWD/REV (Multi-function input ) (E1-
04=2)

SC Sequence control input common

Table 6.44 3-Wire Sequence Wiring Diagram

2 ms minimum

Run command Either ON or OFF

Stop Command OFF (stop)

Forward/reverse
OFF (forward) ON (reverse)
command

Motor speed

Stop Forward Reverse Stop Forward

Table 6.45 3-Wire Sequence Operation

Note:
1. When entering a Run command, close the terminal for minimum 2 ms.
2. If the Run command is active at power up and b1-10 (Run Command at Power up)= 0 (Ignore), the protection will
be triggered and LED indicator will flash. Set b1-10 (Run Command at Power up)=1 (Accept) to accept an active Run
command at power up.

WARNING! Safety during Machinery Restart

· Make sure wiring for Run/ Stop and safety circuits are correct and check if the machinery is normal after
applying power to the drive. Improper wiring could cause inquiry due to machinery sudden movement. When
setting 3-wire sequence control, the drive could suddenly start running due to the control circuit momentarily
close.

129
· If the Run command is active at power up with 3-wire sequence wiring and 2-wire sequence setting (default),
the motor will run in reverse direction at power up. To avoid this, set b1-10 (Run Command at Power up)=0
(Ignore) to ignore an active Run command at power up.

3 : Local / Remote Selection

Switch the command source (Local/ Remote) by opening/ closing the terminal.
Terminal Description
Open Remote (If no terminal is assigned to E1- □ □ =4, b1-00 and b1-01 are enabled. If a
multi-function input terminal is assigned to E1-□□=4, this terminal determines the source
for frequency command and Run command.)
Closed Local (Frequency command and Run command are entered from the keypad.
Note:
1. When a multi-function input terminal is assigned to Local/ Remote, the LO/RE key on the keypad is disabled.
2. LED indicator is lit in Local mode.
3. Local/ Remote cannot be switched during run. Refer to b1-05 for the run command action after switch.

4 : Command Source 1/2 Selection

Switches the command source by opening/ closing the terminal as per the following table.
Terminal Description
Open b1-00 (Frequency Command Selection 1) , b1-01 (Run Command Selection 1)
Closed b1-07 (Frequency Command Selection 2) , b1-08 (Run Command Selection 2)
Note: This cannot be switched during run.

5 to 8 : Multi-Step Speed Command 1 to 4

Switches multi-step speed frequency commands L1-00 to L1-15. Refer to L1-00 to L1-15
(Frequency Command 1 to 16) for details.

9 : Jog Frequency

The Job frequency set by L1-16 is enabled when the terminal is closed. And the acceleration
and deceleration time will be the values set to C1-11 and C1-12.

10/ 11 : Up/Down Command

Allows the frequency command to be set to two external terminals. Always set E1-□□= 10 (Up
Command) and E1-□□= 11 (Down Command) in pair. To set the frequency by Up/ Down
command, set b1-00 or b1-07 (Frequency Command Selection) to 2 (Terminal Up/Down)
according to the following table.
Terminal Drive Operation
Up Command (10) Down Command ( 11)

130
 Open Open Hold the current frequency command
Closed Open Increase frequency command
Open Closed Decrease frequency command
Closed Closed Hold the current frequency command
Note: When only either of Up or Down command is assigned, an oPE03 (Multi-Function Input Selection Error) alarm
will be triggered.

Using Up/ Down Function with Frequency Command Hold (L4-00)

· When the Run command is removed and L4-00 =0 (Frequency Command Hold Disabled),
the Up/ Down command will be reset to 0.
· When L4-00=1 (Frequency Command Hold Enabled), the drive will save the frequency
command set by Up/ Down command. When the drive stops, the frequency command will
be saved. To reset the saved command to 0, remove the Run command and close the Up
or Down input. Refer to L4-00 for details.

Using Up/ Down Function with Frequency Command Limits (L2)

· The frequency command upper limit is set in L2-00.
· The frequency command lower limit can be set by analog input or L2-01. If the analog
input is set to 2, whichever smaller from the analog input or the L2-01 setting is the lower
limit.

Up/ Down command operation is illustrated in the following figure. In this example, the
frequency command lower limit is determined by L2-01.

131
 Output frequency
upper limit

Acceleration to L4-00=1
lower limit
Same frequency
L4-00=0
Output frequency
lower limit

ON
Forward run/
stop

ON
Up command
ON Held
frequency
reset
Down command

ON ON
Power supply

Figure 6.46 Up/ Down Command Operation

12/ 13: Up2/ Down 2 Command

Increases or decreases the frequency command bias. Refer to parameter L2 for details.

14/ 15: FJOG/RJOG Command

FJOG/RJOG commands are Jog frequency which do not require a Run command. And the
acceleration and deceleration time will be the values set to C1-11 and C1-12. If the input
terminal assigned to FJOG command is closed, the drive runs in forward direction at the
frequency set to L1-16. The RJOG command also causes the same action in reverse direction.
The FJOG and RJOG command can be set independently.
Note:
· The FJOG/ RJOG command overrides all other frequency commands. However, RJOG command is disabled
when b1-03= 1 (Reverse Rotation Disabled).
· Entering both the FJOG and RJOG commands simultaneously for 500 ms or longer will trigger an alarm and
the drive will ramp to stop.

132
 L1-16

Output
Frequency

L1-16

ON
FJOG

ON
RJOG

Figure 6.47 FJOG/ RJOG Command Operation

16 : Acc./Dec. Time Selection 1

Switches between C1-00, C1-01 (Acc./Dec. Time 1) and C1-02, C1-03 (Acc./Dec. Time 2) by
opening or closing the terminal. Refer to C1-00 to C1-07 (Acc./Dec. Time 1 to 4) for details.

17 : Acc./Dec. Time Selection 2

Selects acceleration and deceleration times 1 to 4 in combination with E1-□□= 16 (Acc./Dec.

Time Selection 1). Refer to C1-00 to C1-07 (Acc./Dec. 1 to 4) for details.

18 : Acc./Dec. Ramp Hold

When the terminal is closed, the drive holds the output frequency. When the terminal is
reopened, the drive resumes the acceleration or deceleration. Refer to L4-00 (Frequency
Command Hold) for details.

19∶ Baseblock Command

20∶ Retain

21: Fast Stop (Normal Open/ Normal Closed)

If a fast stop command is entered during run, the drives use the deceleration time set in C1-08
to stop the motor. Refer to C1-08 (Fast Stop Time). Once the fast stop command is entered,
The drive can be restarted until a fully stop, removing the Fast Stop input and the Run
command.
· To trigger Fast Stop with an normal open terminal, set E1-□□= 21.
· To trigger Fast Stop with an normal closed terminal, set E1-□□= 22.

133
 Run/Stop ON

Fast Stop
ON
E1-00=21

Deceleration
according to C1-08

Output
Frequency Time

Figure 6.49 Fast Stop Operation

WARNING! Rapid deceleration could trigger an overvoltage fault. When the fault is triggered, the drive output

will be shut off the motor will coast resulting uncontrolled motor state. To avoid this, set an appropriate
deceleration time to C1-08.

22: Retain

23 to 38 : External Fault

Stops the drive when problems occur with external devices.

To use the external fault function, set E1-00 to E1-07=23 to 38. While an external fault is
triggered, EF□ will be displayed on the keypad where □ is the number of the terminal
assigned to the external fault signal. For example, if an external fault signal is input to terminal
S3, then EF3 will be displayed.
Selects the value to set to E1-□□ from a combination of the following three conditions:
· Input signal from peripheral devices
· Detection method of external fault
· Stopping method (for external fault detection)
The following table shows the combination of the conditions.
Input Signal Detection Method
Stopping method
<1> <2>
Setting Detected Ramp Alarm Only
Normal Normal Always Coast to Fast Stop
during to Stop (continue
Open Close Detected Stop (fault) (fault)
Run only (fault) operation)
23 O O O
24 O O O
25 O O O
26 O O O
27 O O O
28 O O O

134
 29 O O O
30 O O O
31 O O O
32 O O O
33 O O O
34 O O O
35 O O O
36 O O O
37 O O O
38 O O O
<1> Determine the terminal status to detect the fault. (Normal Open: detection when terminal closed, normal
closed: detection when terminal open)
<2> Determine the detection should be enabled only during run or always detected.

39: Fault Reset

When a fault is detected, close the assigned terminal output, shut off the drive output and stop
the motor. Most of the faults cause the motor to coast, but stopping method can be set for
some faults (e.g. P1-03 Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection). To restart the drive, either
remove the Run command, press the RESET key ( ) on the keypad, or set 39 (Fault Reset) to
any terminal input in E1-00 to E1-07 and close the terminal input.
Note: A fault reset signal will be ignored during run. Remove the Run command to perform fault reset.

40 : oH2 (AC drive Overheat Alarm)

When the input terminal is closed, oH2 alarm is triggered (the drive continue operation).

41 : Multi-Function Analog Input Selection( Terminal A1 and A2)

Enabled or disabled the multi-function analog input. When the assigned multi-function
terminal input is open, the drive will ignore the analog input set to E3-12. To enable the analog
input set to E3-12, close the input terminal.

42~44: Retain

45 : Communication Mode

Set this when using communications. The assigned terminal input can receive signals from
Modbus or optional communication card.

46 : PID Disable

Even if PID control is enabled by b5-00 ( PID Control Setting), closing the assigned input

135
terminal will disable it. PID control remains active when the terminal is open.

47 : PID Integral Reset

Resets the PID control integral value to 0 when closing the input terminal. Refer to

48 : PID Integral Hold

Holds the PID integral value when the input terminal is closed, and restarts PID integral when
the terminal is open. Refer to Fig 6.16？

49 : PID Soft-Start On/Off

Disables b5-16 (PID Command Acc./Dec. Time) when the input terminal is closed and enables
it when the terminal is open. Refer to Fig 6.16？

50 : PID Input Characteristics Switch

Switches the PID input characteristics. Refer to Fig 6.16？

51 : Retain

52 : Timer Input

Use this setting combination with E2-□□=15 (Timer Output). Refer to b4 (Timer Function) for
details.

53/54/55 : Offset Frequency 1/ 2/ 3

Adds offset frequencies L6-00 to L6-02 to the frequency command when the terminal is closed.
Refer to L6-00 to L6-02 (Offset Frequency 1/ 2/ 3).

56 : Retain

57: KEB Command 1

Enables or disables KEB Command 1. When KEB Command 1 is enabled, selects KEB method
from P2-09 = 0 to 2.
Drive Operation Multi-Function Terminal Input
Setting (Normal Closed) Setting (Normal Open)
KEB Function Open Closed
Normal Operation Closed Open

58：Retain

136
59：Retain

60 : Program Lockout

When the input terminal is closed parameter settings can be changed. When the input
terminal is open, all the parameter settings other than U1-01 (Frequency Command Monitor)
cannot be changed. However parameter settings can always be viewed.

61 : Analog Frequency Command Hold

Sample the frequency command being input to terminal A1, A2 at which the drive will run.
When the input terminal is closed for 100ms, the drive same the frequency command and hold
the level as illustrated in the following figure. When the power is cut off, the held frequency
command will be cleared and the frequency command will be reset to 0.

Frequency
Analog command
input

Time

Frequency OFF ON
Command Hold

100 ms 100 ms

Figure 6.51 Analog Frequency Command Hold Operation

When this function is used with any of the following function at the same time, an oPE12 error
will be triggered.
· Setting 18 (Acc./Dec. Ramp Hold)
· Setting 10 and 11 (Up/Down Command)
· Setting 53 to 55 (Offset Frequency 1/ 2/ 3)
· Setting 12 and 13 (Up 2/ Down 2 Command)

62: Retain

63: External Speed Search Command

If any multi-function input terminal (E1-00 to E1-07) is set to 63 and closed one second before
run, Speed Search will start from the frequency command regardless the b3-00 setting.

64: Retain

137
65 : DC Braking

Stops the motor during deceleration. When a Run command or Jog command is entered, the
DC braking will be removed as illustrated in the following figure. Refer to b2 (DC Braking) for
details.
DC braking OFF ON OFF
command

Run OFF ON OFF

command
DC braking
DC braking DC Braking
Start Level
Output ( b2-00 )
frequency
Figure 6.52 DC Braking Operation

66 to 68: Retain

69 : Drive Enabled

The drive does not accept any Run command until the input terminal closes. When the input
terminal is open, the keypad will display “DNE”.
If a Run command is entered before the assigned terminal closes, then drive will not run until
the Run command is cycled. If the terminal is open during run, the drive will stop according to
b1-02 (Stopping Method Selection). Refer to b1-02 for details.

70 to 73: Retain

74 : S7 is set to pulse input or PWM

E2 Multi-Function Digital Output

E2- 00 to E2- 02 Relay 1/ Relay 2 And D1/ DC Function Selection

The drive has four multi-function output terminals. Assign the functions to E2-00 to
E2-02according to Table 6.20.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default
E2-00 Relay 1 Function Selection 0~49/100~149 0: During run
E2-01 Relay 2 Function Selection 0~49/100~149 11: Fault
D1/DC Function Selection (Open 0~49/100~149
E2-02 1: Zero Speed
Collector)
Table 6.20 Multi-Function Output Terminal Settings
Note1. If reverse the digital output terminal output function, parameter setting can be selected for
138
its hundreds digit 1 can be realized
EX: select operation mode for the NC, the parameter can be set to 100.
Setting Function Setting Function
0 During Run 29 Mechanical Weakening Detection (Normal
Open)
1 Zero Speed Holding 30 Retain
2 Frequency (Speed) Agree 31 Retain
3 User-Defined Frequency (Speed ) Agree 32 Retain
4 Drive Ready 33 Retain
5 Uv (Undervoltage) Detection 34 Retain
6 During Baseblock 35 During Frequency Output
7 Retain 36 Drive Enabled
8 Frequency Command Source 37 Watt Hour Pulse Output
9 Frequency Command Loss 38 Local/Remote Mode
10 Run Command Source 39 During Speed Search
11 Fault 40 PID Feedback Low
12 Communication Mode 41 PID Feedback High
13 Alarm 42 During KEB Operation
14 Fault Restart 43 Retain
15 Timer Output 44 During Fast Stop
16 Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1 45 Retain
17 Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2 46 Rotor Position Detection Complete
18 Overvoltage/Undervoltage Detection 1 47 Retain
19 Retain 48 Retain
20 Overvoltage/Undervoltage Detection 2 49 Brake Control (Desired frequency attained)
21 Retain
22 During Reverse
23 Motor 1/ 2 Selection
24 During Regeneration 100 to
25 Restart Enabled 0 to 49 with Inverse Output
26 Motor Overload Pre-Alarm (oL1) 149
(Including oH3)
27 Drive Overheat Pre-Alarm (oH)
28 Retain

0 : During Run

When the drive is outputting voltage, the output terminal closes.

139
 Terminal Description
Open The drive is stopped.
Closed A Run command is input or the drive is during DC braking or deceleration

Run OFF ON
command

Baseblock OFF ON
command

Output
frequency

OFF ON
During Run

Figure 6.53 During Run Operation

1 : Zero Speed Holding

When the output frequency falls below the d1-08 (Minimum Output Frequency) or b2-00
(Zero Speed Holding Start Level) setting, the output terminal closes.
Terminal Description
Open Output frequency is higher than the d1-08 or b2-00 setting
Closed Output frequency is lower than the d1-08 or b2-00 setting
Note: In IM/ PM Closed-Loop Vector Control, the terminal closes when the output frequency falls below the b2-00
setting. In all other control method, the terminal closes when the output frequency falls below the d1-08 setting.

Output d1-08 or b2-00

frequency or
motor speed

Zero speed OFF ON

Figure 6.54 Zero Speed Holding Operation

2 : Frequency (Speed) Agree

When the output frequency is within the value set to P4-01 (Frequency Detection Width), the
output terminal closes regardless the rotation direction.
Terminal Description
Open The output frequency does not match the frequency demand during run
Closed Output frequency is within the value set to P4-01
Note:
1. The detection works in both forward and reverse directions.

140
2. In Closed-Loop Vector Control, the terminal closes when the motor speed is within the value set to P4-01.

Frequency
command P4-01
Output
frequency or
motor speed
P4-01

Speed agree OFF ON

Figure 6.55 Speed Agree Operation

3: User-Defined Frequency (Speed ) Agree

When the output frequency and frequency command are both within the P4-00 (Frequency
Detection Level) level plus or minus the P4-01 (Frequency Detection Width) value, the output
terminal closes.
Terminal Description
Open Output frequency or frequency command is outside of the range of (P4-00 ± P4-01)
Output frequency and frequency command are both within the range of (P4-00 ±
Closed
P4-01)
Note:
1. The detection and the P4-00 level work in both forward and reverse directions.
2. Closed-Loop Vector Control時為電機速度和頻率指令.

Frequency command + P4-01

Frequency
command
P4-00 + P4-01
Frequency command - P4-01
P4-00

P4-00 - P4-01 Output

frequency
During
forward
0 Hz
During reverse
-P4-00 + P4-01

Output -P4-00
frequency
Frequency + P4-01
-P4-00 – P4-01
Frequency
command
Frequency
command – P4-01
OFF OFF OFF
User-defined
speed agree
ON ON ON ON

Figure 6.56 User-Defined Frequency (Speed ) Agree Operation

4 : Drive Ready

141
When the drive is ready to run or during run, the output terminal closes. According to the
conditions listed below, when a fault occurs or the drive cannot run even if a Run command is
entered, the output terminal closes.
· When the power is cut off
· During a fault
· When the internal power supply of the drive malfunctions
· When an improper parameter setting makes the drive unable to run
· An overvoltage or undervoltage fault is triggered during stop
· When setting a parameter in the programming mode

5 : Uv (Undervoltage) Detection

When the main circuit DC voltage falls below the Uv detection level, the output terminal closes.
The Uv detection level is set in P2-03.
Terminal Description
Open The main circuit voltage is higher than the P2-03 level
Closed The main circuit voltage is lower than the P2-03 level

6 : During Baseblock

During baselock, the output terminal closes and the output transistors do not switch.
Terminal Description
Open The drive is not performing baseblock
Closed The drive is performing baseblock

7: Retain

8 : Frequency Command Source

Displays the currently selected frequency command source.

Terminal Description
Open Frequency command is provided from external command 1 (b1-00) or 2 (b1-07)
Closed Frequency command is provided from the drive keypad

9 : Frequency Command Loss

When a frequency command loss is detected, the assigned output terminal closes. Refer to
P4-02 (Frequency Command Loss Detection Selection) for details.

10: Run Command Source

Displays the currently selected Run command source.

Terminal Description
142
 Open Run command is provided from external command 1 (b1-01) or 2 (b1-08)
Closed Run command is provided from the drive keypad.

11 : Fault

When a fault is triggered, the assigned output terminal closes.

12 : Communication Mode

If the terminal is assigned to 12, it can be the output terminal for the upper controller using
Modbus communication. If the signal is not set by the upper controller, the signal will not
perform any action.

13 : Alarm

When an alarm such as PID Feedback High (FBH), PID Feedback Low (FBL) or Overcurrent (HCA)
is triggered, the assigned output terminal closes.

14 : Fault Restart

When attempting to reset a fault from the control circuit terminals, via serial communications,
the assigned output terminal closes.

15 : Timer Output

Sets a output terminal as the output for the timer function. Refer to b4 (Timer Function).

16 : Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1

When the output frequency exceeds the P4-00 (Frequency Detection Level) level plus the
P4-01 (Frequency Detection Width) level, the assigned output terminal closes until the output
frequency reaches the P4-00 level.
Terminal Description
Open The output frequency exceeds the P4-00 level plus the P4-01 level
Closed The output frequency does not exceed the P4-00 level plus the P4-01 level
Note:
1. The detection and the P4-00 level work in both forward and reverse directions.
2. It will be the motor speed when using Closed-Loop Vector Control.

Output P4-01
frequency P4-00

P4-00
P4-01
Frequency
detection 1 ON OFF

143
 Figure 6.57 Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1 Operation

17 : Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2

When the output frequency exceeds the P4-00 (Frequency Detection Level) level, the assigned
output terminal closes until the output frequency reaches the P4-00 level minus the P4-01
value.
Terminal Description
The output frequency does not exceed the P4-00 level, or below the P4-00 level minus
Open
the P4-01 value.
Closed The output frequency exceeds the P4-00 level
Note:
1. The detection and the P4-00 level work in both forward and reverse directions.
2. It will be the motor speed when using Closed-Loop Vector Control.

P4-01
Output P4-00
frequency

P4-00
P4-01
Frequency
detection 2 OFF ON

Figure 6.58 Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2 Operation

18/20: Overvoltage/ Undervoltage Detection 1/2

Outputs the overvoltage or undervoltage situations to the external devices. Set the torque
detection and the output setting listed below. Refer to P6 (Overtorque/ Undertorque
Detection) for details.
Setting Terminal Description
Overvoltage/ Undervoltage Detection 1 (Normal Open)
The output current or torque exceeds the P6-01 (Overtorque/ Undertorque
18 Open
Detection Level 1) level for the P6-02 (Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection
Time 1) time
Overvoltage/ Undervoltage Detection 2 (Normal Open)
The output current or torque exceeds the P6-04 (Overtorque/ Undertorque
20 Closed
Detection Level 2) level for the P6-05 (Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection
Time 2) time

22 : During Reverse

When the motor run in the reverse direction, the assigned output terminal closes.
Terminal Description

144
 Open The motor runs in the forward direction
Closed The motor runs in the reverse direction

Output
frequency

Forward Run
command

Reverse Run
command

During OFF ON
reverse
Time

Figure 6.59 During Reverse Operation

23: Retain

24: During Regeneration

When the motor outputs during regeneration, the assigned output terminal closes.

25 : During Restart

When the drive attempts to clear a fault during restart, the assigned output terminal closes. If
the fault is cleared after restart, the output terminal opens. If the number of restart attempt
reaches the number set to P5-00 (Number of Auto Restart Attempts) without clearing a fault
successfully, the output terminal opens after the fault is triggered.

26 : Motor Overload Pre-Alarm (oL1)

When the motor overload level exceeds 90% of the detection level, the assigned output
terminal closes. Refer to P1-00 (Motor Protection Function Selection) for details.

27 : Drive Overheat Pre-Alarm (oH)

When the drive heatsink temperature exceeds the oH (overheat) detection level, the assigned
output terminal closes.

28 : Retain

29 : Mechanical Weakening Detection (Normal Open)

When the mechanical weakening situation is detected, the assigned output terminal closes.

30~34 : Retain

145
35: During Frequency Output

When the drive is outputting frequency, the assigned output terminal closes.
Terminal Description
Open The drive is during stop, baseblock or DC braking.
Closed The drive is outputting frequency

Run OFF ON
command

Baseblock OFF ON
command

Output
frequency

During frequency OFF ON

output

Figure 6.60 During Frequency Output Operation

36: Drive Enabled

Shows the status of multi-function terminal input E1-□□= 69 (Drive Enabled). When the input
terminal E1-□□= 69 is closed, the output terminal closes as well.

37: Watt Hour Pulse Output

Outputs a pulse to indicate the watt hours. Refer to E2-05 (Output Power Detection Scaling )
for details.

38 : Local/Remote Mode

The output terminal closes in Local mode and opens in Remote mode.
Terminal Description
Remote: The frequency and Run command can be provided by the external device
Open
selected by b1-00/b1-01 or b1-07/b1-08.
Closed Local: The frequency and Run command can be provided by the drive keypad.

39 : During Speed Search

The assigned output terminal closes during Speed Search. Refer to b3 (Speed Search) for
details.

40 :PID Feedback Low

146
When a PID Feedback Low is detected, the assigned output terminal closes. When the PID
feedback value falls below the b5-12 level for longer than the time set to b5-13, the fault will
be detected. Refer to b5-11 on page 79

41 :PID Feedback High

When a PID Feedback High is detected, the assigned output terminal closes. When the PID
feedback value exceeds the b5-22 level for longer than the time set to b5-23, the fault will be
detected. Refer to b5-11 on page 79？

42 : During KEB Operation

The assigned output terminal closes during KEB operation. Refer to “KEB function”on page
187？

43 : Retain

44 : During Fast Stop

The assigned output terminal closes during a fast stop. Refer to setting 21 and 22 (Fast Stop)
of multi-function Digital Inputs.

45 : Retain.

When the internal cooling fan alarm is triggered, the assigned output terminal closes.

46 ：Rotor Position Detection Complete

After the Run command is given and the rotor position detection is complete, the assigned
terminal closes.

47：Retain

48：Retain

49：Brake Control

If E2-00 ~ E2-03 (Multi-Function Digital Output) is set to 49 (the brake control), when the run
command is ON and inverter output frequency ≥ P4-05 (mechanical brake release frequency),
the terminal is closed until the when the inverter operation command is OFF and the output
frequency ≤ P4-06 (mechanical brake operation frequency), the terminal is disconnected

147
 Frequency
输出频率 Reference

P4-05

P4-06

OFF(开) ON(闭)
E2-0X = 49

OFF ON
Run Command
运转指令

Figure 6.60.2 brake control schematic

Note1. Brake control is set to the terminal of the once closed, to simultaneously meet the "inverter
operation command to OFF" and "Output frequency ≤P4-06", the terminal will disconnect

100 to 149 : 0 to 49 with Inverse Output

Inverted output of the selected multi-function contact output. By 1 □□ after 2 to select

reverse output.
Example : 106 = "6 (base interdiction in)" Reverse output

 E2- 04 Retain

 E2- 05 Watt Hour Output Unit

Selects the output unit for the terminal assigned to E2-00 or E2-03=37 for one pulse signal.
This output function provides a watt hour meter or a PLC input by a 200ms pulse signal.
No. Name Setting Range Default
0 ∶ 0.1 kWh units
1 ∶ 1 kWh units
E2-05 Watt Hour Output Unit 2 ∶ 10 kWh units 0
3 ∶ 100 kWh units
4 ∶ 1000 kWh units
Note:
1. When a power output is negative(i.e. regeneration), it does not subtract from the total watt hours.
2. The drive keeps track of the watt hours only when the control circuit is powered. The value is reset once the
power supply is cut off.

148
 E2-05
(Watt Hour Output Unit )

Integral power
(every 100 ms )
E2-00 to E2-03
(Multi-Function
Digital Output) OFF ON OFF

0.2 s

Figure 6.61 Watt Hour Output Operation

The drive has two multi-function analog inputs (A1 and A2). Set the terminal A1 and A2

according to Table 6.21.

 E2- 06 Relay 1 On Delay

No. Name Setting Range Default

E2-06 Relay 1 On Delay 0.0 ～ 3600.0 s 0.0 s

 E2- 07 Relay 1 Off Delay

No. Name Setting Range Default

E2-07 Relay 1 Off Delay 0.0 ～ 3600.0 s 0.0 s

 E2- 08 Relay 2 On Delay

No. Name Setting Range Default

E2-08 Relay 2 On Delay 0.0 ～ 3600.0 s 0.0 s

 E2- 09 Relay 2 Off Delay

No. Name Setting Range Default

E2-09 Relay 2 Off Delay 0.0 ～ 3600.0 s 0.0 s

Example 1: Setting E2- 06/ E2- 07/ E2- 08/ E2- 09 > 0.0s。

149
 Run OFF ON OFF
Command

OFF ON OFF
Relay

E2-06/E2-08 E2-07/E2-09
Relay On Delay Relay Off Delay

Example 2: Setting E2- 06/ E2- 08 > 0.0s

Run OFF ON OFF

Command

Relay

E2-06/E2-08 Relay On Delay

Example 3: Setting E2- 07/ E2- 09 ≠ 0.0 s

Run OFF ON OFF ON

Command

OFF ON
Relay

E2-07/E2-09 Relay off Delay

 E3 Multi-Function Analog Input

 E3- 00 Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection

Sets the signal level for terminal A1.

No. Name Setting Range Default
E3-00 Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection 0, 1 0

0: 0 to 10 V

150
Inputs a 0 to 10 V signal. A negative signal by the gain and voltage bias is limited to 0%.

1: -10 to 10 V

Inputs a -10V to 10 V signal. A forward Run command can be compensated by the gain and
voltage bias to become a negative signal and run the motor in the reverse direction.

 E3- 01 Terminal A1 Function Selection

Select the function to terminal A1. Refer to Table 6.21 on page 166.
No. Name Setting Range Default
E3-01 Terminal A1 Function Selection 0 to 19 0

 E3-02/ E3-03 Terminal A1 Input Gain/ Voltage Bias

E3-02 sets the terminal A1 input gain as a percentage when inputting 10V. E3-03 sets the
terminal A1 input voltage bias as a percentage when inputting 0V. Terminal A1 input
characteristics are determined by E3-02 and E3-03.
No. Name Setting Range Default
E3-02 Terminal A1 Input Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0%
E3-03 Terminal A1 Voltage Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%

Examples

 Gain =200%, voltage bias = 0%, terminal A1 is used as frequency command input (E3-01
=0)
When inputting a 10 V signal, the frequency command will be 200%. When inputting a 5V
signal, the frequency command is 100%.
As the drive output is limited by d1-02 (Maximum Output Frequency), the frequency command
will be 100% when the signal is 5 V and above.
E3-00 = 0 E3-00 = 1

Gain = 200% Gain = 200%

Frequency 100%
command d1-02

100% -10 V -5 V
d1-02 0V 5V 10 V

100%
d1-02

Bias = 0% Gain = -200%

0V 5V 10 V

Figure 6.62 Frequency Command Adjusted by Input Gain and Bias

151
 Bias = -25%, terminal A1 is used as frequency command input
When inputting a 0 V signal, the frequency command will be -25%.
When E3-00=0 and inputting a signal between 0 to 2 V, the frequency command will be 0%.
When E3-00=0 and inputting a signal between 2 to 10 V, the frequency command will be
between 0 to 100%.
When E3-00=1 and inputting 0 to 2 V, the motor will run in the reverse direction.
E3-00 = 0 E3-00 = 1

Gain = 100%

Gain = 100%

Frequency
-10 V -6 V
command E3-00 = 0
2.0 V 10 V

0V
10 V
2.0 V
Gain = -100%
Bias = -25%
d1-02
E3-00 = 1

Gain = -150%

Figure 6.63 Frequency Command Adjusted by Input Gain and Negative Bias

 E3-04 Retain

 E3-05 Terminal A1 Input Filter Time

Sets the terminal A1 primary delay filter time, which can stabilize the drive operation by
eliminating the interference. Long filter time stabilizes the drive but causes slow response to
the analog input signal changes.

No. Name Setting Range Default

E3-05 Terminal A1 Input Filter Time 0.00 to 2.00 s 0.5 s

 E3-06 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection

Selects the signal level for terminal A2. Refer to Table 6.21 on page 166..
No. Name Setting Range Default
E3-06 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection 0 to 3 1

0: 0 to 20 mA

1: 4 to 20 mA

2: 0 to 10 V

152
A negative signal by the gain and voltage bias is limited to 0%.

3: 0 to 5 V

A negative signal by the gain and voltage bias is limited to 0%.

 E3-07 Terminal A2 Function Selection

Sets the function for terminal A2. Refer to Table 6.21 on page 166.
No. Name Setting Range Default
E3-07 Terminal A2 Function Selection 0 to 19 8

 E3-08/E3-09 Terminal A2 Input Gain / Voltage Bias

E3-08 sets the terminal A2 input gain as a percentage when inputting 10V. E3-09 sets the
terminal A2 input voltage bias as a percentage when inputting 0V.
No. Name Setting Range Default
E3-08 Terminal A2 Input Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0%
E3-09 Terminal A2 Voltage Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%

 E3-10 Terminal A2 (4-20mA disconnected selection)

No. Name Setting Range Default

E3-10 Terminal A2 (4-20mA disconnected 0~3 0
selection)

0 : no disconnected selection
1 : By setting frequency P4-03，and displayed ANL
2 : Frequency is 0, and displayed ANL
3 : Stop immediately, and displayed the ACE

 E3-11 Terminal A2 Input Filter Time

No. Name Setting Range Default

E3-11 Terminal A2 Input Filter Time 0.00 to 2.00 0.5 s

Sets the terminal A2 primary delay filter time, which can stabilize the drive operation by
eliminating the interference. Long filter time stabilizes the drive but causes slow response to
the analog input signal changes.

 E3-12 Analog Input Terminal Enable/ Disable Selection

No. Name Setting Range Default

E3-12 Analog Input Terminal Enable/ Disable Selection 0 to 3 3
Enables the analog inputs when Multi-Function Terminal Input E1-□□ = 41 (Multi-Function

153
Analog Input Selection).

0: Both Terminal A1 and A2 Disabled

1: Only Analog Input Terminal A1 Enabled

2: Only Analog Input Terminal A2 Enabled

3: Both Terminal A1 and A2 Enabled

■ Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings

Assign the function listed in E3-01 and E3-07 to terminal A1 and A2 according to Table 6.21.
Note: The scaling of the functions listed below can be adjusted by the gain and bias. When assigning the function to
the terminal, set an appropriate gain and bias.

Table 6.21 Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings

Setting Function Setting Retain
0 Main Frequency Command 14 Retain
1 Frequency Gain 15 Retain
2 Output Frequency Lower Limit 16 Retain
3 Auxiliary Frequency Command 17 Retain
4 Output Voltage Bias 18 Communication Mode 1
5 Acc./Dec. Time Gain (Decrease Only) 19 Communication Mode 2
6 DC Braking (DB) Current
7 Stall Prevention Level During Run
8 PID Feedback
9 PID Target
10 Differential PID Feedback
11 Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection
12 Retain
13 Retain

0 : Main Frequency Command

Enters the frequency command via an analog input terminal when b1-00 or b1-07=1

1 : Frequency Gain

The input value of the assigned terminal will be multiplied with the analog frequency
command value.
Example: When the frequency command from terminal A1 is 80%, and the frequency gain set
to terminal A2 is 50%, the resulting frequency command will be 40% of the maximum output

154
frequency.

2 : Output Frequency Lower Limit

The output frequency lower limit can be adjusted by the analog input value.

3 : Auxiliary Frequency Command

Sets the auxiliary frequency command 1 when multi-step speed operation is selected. Refer to
L1-00~L1-16 on page 108 ？

4 : Output Voltage Bias

Voltage bias increases the output voltage of the V/F characteristics as a percentage of 200V or
400V depending on the power supply. This function is only available in the V/F Control
method.

5 : Acc./Dec. Time Gain (Decrease Only)

Adjusts the gain for acc./ dec. time assigned to C1-00 to C1-07.
When the acceleration time is assigned to C1-00, the drive acceleration time is calculated
below.
Acc. Time = C1-00 Acc. time × Acc./dec. time gain

Acc./Dec. gain from 1 to 10 V

( 10 V )
= ╳ 10 (%)
Input voltage ( V )
100%

50%

20%
10%

0 1V 2V 5V 10 V

Figure 6.64 Acc./Dec. Time Gain Using Analog Input

6 : DC Braking (DB) Current

Adjusts the DC braking current by the analog input value.

When 10 V voltage or 20 mA current is input, the braking current will be 100% of the drive
rated output current. The actual DC braking current is determined by the analog input value or
the b2-01 value whichever is smaller.

155
 DC braking current level

100%
Drive rated current

0 10 V
( 4mA ) ( 20mA )

Figure 6.65 DC Braking Current Using Analog Input

7 : Stall Prevention Level During Run

Adjusts the stall prevention level by the analog input signal. The stall prevention level is
determined by the analog input value or the P3-06 value whichever is smaller.

Stall prevention level during Run

100%

30%

Analog input level

0 3V 10 V
( 4mA ) ( 8.8mA ) ( 20mA )

Figure 6.66 Stall Prevention Level Using Analog Input

8 : PID Feedback

Sets the PID feedback by the analog input value. To use this function, enable the PID control in
b5-00. Refer to b5-11 on page 79

9 : PID Target

Sets the PID target value by the analog input value. The frequency command entered by the
command source selected in b1-00 (Frequency Command Selection 1) is disabled. To use this
function, enable the PID control in b5-00. Refer to b5-11 on page 79 for details.

10: Differential PID Feedback

156
Sets the differential PID feedback by the analog input value. The difference of the PID feedback
input value and the differential feedback input value is used to calculate the PID input.

11 : Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection

Sets the detection level for overtorque and undertorque by the analog input value. Use the
combination of this function and P6-00 (Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection Selection 1). This
is the secondary source for P6-01 (Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection Level 1). When the
input is 100% (10 V, 20 mA), the motor rated torque will be 100%. Refer to P6 (Overtorque/
Undertorque Detection) for details.

18/19 : Communication Mode

If the terminal is assigned to 18 or 19, ther input signal can be used as an analog input from
the upper controller via Modbus.

E4 Multi-Function Analog Output

These parameters assign functions to terminal FM and AM to monitor the status of the drive.

 E4-00 Terminal FM Signal Level Selection

Sets the signal level to terminal FM using E4-01.

No. Name Setting Range Default
E4-00 Terminal FM Signal Level Selection 0, 1 0
0: 0 to 10 V
1: - 10 V to 10 V

 E4-04 Terminal AM Signal Level Selection

Selects the signal level to terminal AM.

No. Name Setting Range Default
E4-04 Terminal AM Signal Level Selection 0, 1, 2 0
0: 0 to 10 V
1: 0 to 20 mA
2: 4 to 20 mA

 E4-01 / E4-05 Terminal FM and AM Monitor Selection

Selects the monitor for terminal FM and AM.

No. Name Setting Range Default
E4-01 Terminal FM Monitor Selection 0 to 11 1
E4-05 Terminal AM Monitor Selection 0 to 11 2

157
 Setting Function
0 Frequency Command
1 Output Frequency
2 Output Current
3 Motor Speed
4 Output Voltage
5 DC Voltage
6 Output Power
7 Retain
8 AI1 Input
9 AI2 Input
10 Soft Starter Output Frequency
11 Pulse Train Input

 E4- 02/ E4- 03 Terminal FM Monitor Gain / Voltage Bias

 E4- 06/ E4- 07 Terminal AM Monitor Gain / Voltage Bias

E4-02/ E4-06 Sets the gain for terminal FM and AM as a percentage.

E4-03/ E4-07 Sets the voltage bias for terminal FM and AM as a percentage.
10 V equals 100% when setting E4-02, E4-03, E4-06 and E4-07. Figure 6.69 illustrates the gain
and bias operation.
No. Name Setting Range Default
E4-02 Terminal FM Monitor Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0%
E4-03 Terminal FM Voltage Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%
E4-06 Terminal AM Monitor Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0%
E4-07 Terminal AM Voltage Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0%

158
 When E4-00, E4-04 = 0 When E4-00, E4-04 = 1
Output
voltage 15V Gain 150%
Output Bias 0%
voltage
10V Gain 100%
Bias 0%

5V Gain 50%
10V Bias 0%
Gain 150%
Bian 0% -100%

Gain 100% 100%

Bias 0%
-5V Monitor value
5V

Gain 50% -10V

Bias 0%

-15V
0V
0% Monitor value 100%

When E4-00, E4-04 = 0 When E4-00, E4-04 = 1

15V
Gain 100%
Output Output Bias 30%
voltage voltage
10V
Gain 100%
Bias 0%
5V
10V
Gain 100%
Bias 30%
-100%

Gain 100% 100%

Bias 0%
-5V Monitor value

3V -10V

-15V
0V
0% Monitor value 100%

Figure 6.69 Analog Output Gain and Bias Opeartion

.
Example 1: When E4-02 = 80% , the voltage output to terminal FM equals to 100% resulting 8
V.
Example 2: When E4-03 = 5% , the voltage output to terminal FM equals to 0% resulting 0.5 V.

E5 Pulse Train Input/ Output

A pulse train signal of maximum 32kHz frequency can input to terminal RP as frequency
command, PID control, PID target, or as the speed feedback in V/F Control method.

The pulse output monitor terminal MP can output drive monitor values as a pulse train signal
of maximum 32kHz frequency.

Set the scale and functions of the pulse input terminal RP and pulse output terminal MP by E5-
□□ as illustrated in Figure 6.70.

159
 Gain, bias Main
=0
frequency
Filter time command
E5-02
RP Period 1
=1 PID
measurement 1 + sT feedback
E5-03 =2
Pulse train E5-04 PID target
0% 100%
E5-00
E5-01 input scaling

Figure 6.70

 E5-00 Pulse Train Input Function Selection

Sets the function for pulse train input terminal RP.

No. Name Setting Range Default
E5-00 Pulse Train Input Function Selection 0 to 2 0

0 : Frequency Command

If the frequency command is set to pulse train input (b1-00=4 or b1-07=4), the drive will use
the frequency command from terminal RP.

1: PID Feedback

The PID feedback value is entered to terminal RP as a pulse signal. Refer to b5-11 on page 79
for details .

2: PID Target

The PID target value is entered to terminal RP as a pulse signal. Refer to b5-11 on page 79 for
details .

 E5-01 Pulse Train Input Scaling

Sets the frequency equal to 100% frequency in Hz.

No. Name Setting Range Default
E5-01 Pulse Train Input Scaling 100 to 32000 Hz 1440 Hz

 E5-02 Pulse Train Input Gain

Sets the level of the input gain to terminal RP.

No. Name Setting Range Default
E5-02 Pulse Train Input Gain 0.0 to 1000.0% 100.0%

 E5-03 Pulse Train Input Voltage Bias

Sets the level of the input voltage bias when no signal (0Hz) is input to terminal RP.
160
 No. Name Setting Range Default
E5-03 Pulse Train Input Voltage Bias -100.0 to 100.0% 0.0%

 E5-04 Pulse Train Input Filter Time

Sets the pulse train input primary filter time in seconds.

No. Name Setting Range Default
E5-04 Pulse Train Input Filter Time 0.00 to 2.00 s 0.10 s

 E5- 05 Pulse Train Input Minimum Frequency

Sets the minimum frequency detected by the pulse train input in units of 0.1 Hz.
· When the pulse input frequency drops below this level, the pulse input value becomes
0.0Hz.
· Enabled when E5-00 = 0, 1 or 2.
· When E5-00 = 3 (Simple Closed-Loop V/F Control), the minimum frequency becomes the
settitng for F1-04.
No. Name Setting Range Default
E5-05 Pulse Train Input Minimum 0.1 to 1000.0 Hz 0.5 Hz
Frequency

 E5-06 Pulse Train Monitor Selection

Selects the pulse train monitor.

No. Name Setting Range Default
E5-06 Pulse Train Monitor Selection 0 to 4 0

Sets the function of pulse train output terminal MP.

Setting Function
0 Frequency Command
1 Output Frequency
2 Soft Starter Output Frequency
3 PID Feedback Value
4 PID Target Value
Notice: When using pulse train monitor, set the peripheral devices according to the load
conditions below. Failure to comply could cause low per formance or machinery damage.

□ When used as a common collector output

Output voltage (insulation type) VRL ( V) Load resistance ( kΩ)
5 V or above 1.5 kΩ or above
8 V or above 4.0 kΩ or above

161
 10 V or above 10 kΩ or above

Used as common collector output

MP

R Load
AC
resistance
L

External power supply (V) DC12 V ±10%, DC15 V ±10%

Common emitter current (mA) 16 mA Max

Used as common emitter input

External power supply

Load
resistance
MP
Common
emitter current

AC

 E5-07 Pulse Train Monitor Scaling

Sets the pulse train output frequency when the specified monitor item is at 100%. Sets E5-06
to 1 (Output Frequency) and E5-07 to 0 to make the pulse train monitor output synchronous to
the output frequency.
No. Name Setting Range Default
E5-07 Pulse Train Monitor Scaling 100 to 32000 Hz 1440 Hz

 E5-08 Terminal RP Function Selection

If b1-00 or b1-07 is set to 4 (Pulse Train Input) and E5-00 is set to 0 (Frequency Command),
thisparameter can be used for pulse train input or PWM signal input for terminal RP.
No. Name Setting Range Default
E5-08 Terminal RP Function Selection 0, 1 0

162
0 ： Pulse train input

1 ： PWM signal input

Wiring：

5V
RP 17
PC 19
PWM input

The PWM signals are input to drive as signal level 5V via terminal RP.

ON Time OFF Time ON Time OFF Time

PWM Cycle PWM Cycle

E5-10 E5-10

On Time
Frequency command (Hz) = ✕Maximum output frequency
PWM Cycle
When the input signal is high via terminal

Setting：

To use PWM signal as the frequency command source, set b1-00 or b1-07 to 4 (Pulse Train
Input), E5-00 to 0(Frequency Command) and E5-08 to 1 (PWM Signal Input). When E5-08
is set to 0 (Pulse Train Input), the drive will use pulse train input as the frequency
command source.
0
Keypad
1
Control circuit terminal
2
Terminal Up/Down Frequency
3 command source
MODBUS通讯
0
Pulse train input
E5-00 = 0 4
PWM input
1
b1-00
E5-08 b1-07

163
 E5-09 Average PWM Signal Times

The drive averages the PWM signal for the set times to be an more stable frequency command.
If it is set to 5 times, the drive then averages the continuous 5 PWM signals as the frequency
command. The more times it is set, the more stable the frequency command will be. But the
response of the frequency command will be slower at the same time.
No. Name Setting Range Default
E5-09 Average PWM Signal Times 1 to 100 1

 E5-10 PWM Signal Cycle

Sets the PWM signal cycle. The tolerance is about ±12.5%.

No. Name Setting Range Default
E5-10 PWM Signal Cycle 1 to 999 ms 100 ms

E6 Optional Communication Card Settings

 E6-00 to E6-05 Retain

 E6-06 Drive Station Address

No. Name Setting Range Default

E6-06 Drive Station Address 1 to 31 1

 E6-07 RS-485 Communication Speed Selection

No. Name Setting Range Default

E6-07 RS-485 Communication Speed Selection 0 to 8 3

0: 1200 bps (bit/sec)

1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
5: 38400 bps
6 : 57600 bps
7 : 76800 bps
8 : 115200 bps

 E6-08 RS-485 Communication Parity Selection

No. Name Setting Range Default

164
 E6-08 RS-485 Communication Parity Selection 0 to 11 1

0: 8, N, 2 (MODBUS RTU)
1: 8, N, 1 (MODBUS RTU)
2: 8, E, 1 (MODBUS RTU)
3: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS RTU)
4: 8, N, 2 (MODBUS ASCII)
5: 8, N, 1 (MODBUS ASCII)
6: 8, E, 1 (MODBUS ASCII)
7: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS ASCII)
8: 7, N, 2 (MODBUS ASCII)
9: 7, N, 1 (MODBUS ASCII)
10: 7, E, 1 (MODBUS ASCII)
11: 7, O, 1 (MODBUS ASCII)

 E6-09 Communication Error Detection Time

Determines the detection time to trigger the communication error. (This function is disabled
when set to 0)
No. Name Setting Range Default
E6-09 Communication Fault Detection time 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.0 s

 E6-10 Transmit Wait Time

Sets the wait time between the drive receiving data and responding data.
No. Name Setting Range Default
E6-10 Transmit Wait Time 5 to 65 ms 5 ms

 E6-11 Drive Operation During Communication Error

No. Name Setting Range Default

E6-1１ Drive Operation During 0, 1 0
Communication Error

0 : Display CE Alarm Only

The drive continues operation.

1 : Display CE Fault

The drive coasts to stop.

165
6.7 Group P, Protections

P1 Motor Protection Function

 P1-00 Motor Protection Function Selection

The drive has an overload protection using an electrothermal relay. The overload telarance is
calculated by the output current, output frequency and thermal motor characteristics. When
the motor overload is detected, an oL1 (Motor Overload) fault shuts off the drive output.
Set this parameter according to the motor being used.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P1-00 Motor Protection Function Selection 0 to 3 0
Note:
1. When the motor protection is enabled (P1-00≠0), an oL1 alarm can be output via the multi-function output
terminal assigned (E2-00 = 26). When the motor overload level exceeds 90% of the oL1 detection level, the output
terminal closes.
2. When the drive is running a single motor, set a value other than 0 to enable this function. An external thermal
relay is not required.

0 : Disabled (Motor Overload Protection Disabled)

Sets 0 (disabled) when using one drive to run more than one motor. Install an overload relay
between the drive and each motor as illustrated in Figure 6.71.

Power
supply
AC Drive M1
MC1 oL1

M2
MC2 oL2

MC1, MC2: Magnetic contactors

Thermal relay: oL1, oL2

Figure 6.71 Protection Circuit for Multiple Motors

NOTICE: When a drive is running more than one motor or a motor with a rated current higher than other standard
motors (such as a submersible motor), the termal protection cannot be provided. Set 0 to P1-00 to disable this
function and install an individual motor thermal relay for each motor. MC1 and MC1 cannot be switch on or off
during run.

1 : General-Purpose Motor (Standard Motor)

166
The motor is self-cooled so the overload tolerance falls when the motor speed is decreased.
The Electrothermal relay trigger level changes according to the motor overload characteristics
to protect the motor from overheat throughout the entire speed range.
Overlaod Characteristics
Overload Tolerance Cooling Ability
(when motor load is 100%)
150

60 seconds
Torque
(%)
100
Motor to operate from
90
Running continuously at below
line power.
50/60 Hz triggers an oL1 fault.
60 Motor cooling is most
50 Continuous A fault is output and the motor
effective when
will coast to stop.
running at 50/60 Hz
Rated speed=100% speed

0 5 33 100 Speed(%)
(60Hz)

2 : Drive Dedicated Motor (Constant Torque Range 1 : 10)

The motor is allowed to run with 100% load from 10% to 100% speed. When the motor runs
slower with 100% load, an overload fault will be triggered.
Overlaod Characteristics
Overload Tolerance Cooling Ability
(when motor load is 100%)

150
Torque 60 seconds
(%)

100

90

Motor cools itself

Continuous run from 6 Hz to
55
effectively even at low
60 Hz
50 Continuous speeds (about 6 Hz)

0 110 100 Speed (%)

(60Hz) Rated speed=100%
speed

3 : Vector Motor (Constant Torque Range 1 : 100)

The motor is allowed to run with 100% load from 1% to 100% speed. When the motor runs
slower with 100% load, an overload fault will be triggered.
Overload Tolerance Cooling Ability Overlaod Characteristics

167
 (when motor load is 100%)
150

Torque 60 seconds
(%)

100

90
Motor cools itself
Continuous run from 6 Hz to
effectively even at low
50 Continuous 60 Hz
speeds (about 6 Hz)

0 110 100 Speed (%)

(60Hz) Rated speed=100%
speed

 P1-01 Motor Overload Protection Time

Sets the time for the drive to shut down on motor overload. (Normal this parameter does not
require adjustment. However, enter the time the motor can withstand operation in a hot motor
overload condition if the motor overload tolerance data is confirmed by the motor
manufacturer.)
No. Name Setting Range Default
P1-01 Motor Overload Protection Time 0.1 to 5.0 min 1.0 min

The default is operation with 150% overload tolerance for one minute in a hot start.
The electrothermal protection operation time is illustrated in the following figure. Motor
overload protection operates in the range between a cold start and a hot start.
( P1-01 = 1 minute, 60 Hz speed, general-purpose motor)
· Cold start: The motor protection operation time responds to an overload situation which
is suddenly reached when strating a stationary motor.
· Hot start: The motor protection operation time responds to an overload situation which
occurs when the motor was running continuousely at its rated current.

Operation time (minutes)

10

Cold
start
1

0.4
Hot
start

0 100 150 200 Motor current(%)

d2-00=100%

168
 Figure 6.72 Motor Protection Opeartion Time

■ Motor Protection Using PTC Input

A motor PTC can be connected to the drive analog input terminal MT for motor overheat
protection.
When the motor PTC signal exceeds the overheat alarm level, the keypad will display OH1
(Motor Overheat) and the motor will continue to run. When the motor PTC signal exceeds the
overheat fault level, the keypad will display OH1 (Motor Overheat) and the drive will shut off
the output and stop the motor using the stop method selected in P1-03.
Connect the PTC according to the following figure.

AC Drive
+V
(+10V, 20mA)

Divider
resistance
12kΩ
A2 (0-10V)

PTC
thermistor
DIP switch S1
AC
V I

Figure 6.73 PTC Input Wiring

The PTC must have the characteristics illustrated in the following figure in each motor phase.
The motor overload protection normally requires 3 PTC inputs connecting in a series.
Resistance
(Ω)
Class F
Class H
150 ℃
180 ℃

1330

550

Tr’ Temperature

Tr–5 Tr Tr + 5 Tr : threshold value

169
 Figure 6.74 PTC Characteristics
Set the overheat detection using a PTC in P1-03 to P1-04 as explained in the section below.

P2 Momentary Power Loss

 P2-00 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection

Selects the drive operation when a momentary power loss occurs (the main circuit DC voltage
falls below the P2-03 level). The drive can automatically return to the operation it was
performing before the power loss.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P2-00 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection 0 to 3 0

0 : Disabled (Default)

When the power supply falls below the P2-03 (Uv Detection Level) value for 10ms, a Uv
(Undervoltage) fault will be triggered to shut off the drive output and the motor coasts to stop.

1 : Recover if CPU Has Power

When the CPU of the drive is powered after a momentary power loss, the drive will resume the
operation. The KEB function will not perform even if KEB is enabled.

2 : KEB function if CPU Has Power

When a momentary power loss occurs, the drive decelearates using regenerative power from
the motor. If the power returns, the drive accelearates to the frequency it was running before
the power loss. If the powe does not return and the output frequency falls below the minimum
output frequency, the drive output will be shut off. in this mode, Multifunction contact input
(E1-xx = 56/57) KEB command is invalid

3 : Ramp to Stop with KEB Deceleration

When a momentary power loss occurs, the drive decelearates using regenerative power from
the motor even if the power recovers within P2-07 (KEB detection) duration. If KEB is assigned
to a multi-function input terminal, the drive accelerates back up when the power returns only if
the input terminal is opened.

■ KEB Function

When a power loss is detected, KEB ( Kinetic Energy Backup) starts decelerating the motor and
using regenerative power to control the motor. Therefore the drive can continue to run during
a momentary power loss. When the power returns, the drive accelerates back up to the
170
frequency it was runinbefore the power loss.
When using a single drive, set P2-09 = 0 (KEB Operation Method 1) or P2-09 = 1 (KEB
Operation Method 2).
When multiple drives have to perform KEB and decelerate at a curtain speed ratio in
applications such as textile machinery, set P2-09 = 1 (KEB Operation Method 2) or 2 (KEB
Operation Method 3).

 P2-01 Minimum Baseblock (bb) Time

Sets the minimum baseblock time when power is restored right after a momentary power loss.
This determines the time the drive waits for the residual voltage in the motor to dissipate.
Increase this value if overcurrent or overvoltage occurs at the beginning of Speed Search and
DC Braking.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P2-01 P2-01 Minimum Baseblock (bb) Time 0.1 to 5.0 s Determined by o2-03,
A1-06

 P2-03 Uv (Undervoltage ) Detection Level

Sets the voltage level of undervoltage detection or KEB function activation. Normally this
parameter does not require any change.

No. Name Setting Range Default

P2-03 Uv (Undervoltage ) Detection Level 150 to 210 V Determined by d1-00
<1> and o2-03<2>
<1> This is the value for 200V. Double this value for 400V.
<2> The default setting for 400 V drives depends on whether the drive input voltage is higher or lower than 400V.
Note:
1. When setting a value lower than the default, install an AC reactor option on the drive input side to prevent
damage to the drive parts.
2. When using KEB function and P2-03 is set too low, the Uv1 (Undervoltage Detection 1) fault will be triggered
before the KEB can be performed. Therefore do not set this value too low.

 P2-04 KEB Deceleration Time

Sets the time to decelerate during KEB function. Set a longer time if Uv1 (Undervoltage
Detaction 1) fault is triggered during KEB function. On the other hand, set a shorter time if ov
(Overvoltage) is triggered during KEB function.
· When performing KEB operation method 1, the drive deceleration time is based on the
setting of P2-04 and changes according to the main circuit voltage.
· When performing KEB operation method 2 or 3, the drive deceleration time is determined

171
 by p2-04.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P2-04 KEB Deceleration Time 0.0 to 6000.0 s 0.0 s
<1>
<1> The setting range is determined by the units set in C1-09 (Acc./Dec. Time Unit Selection). When C1-09 = 0 (0.01
s), then the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).

 P2-05 Acceleration Time after KEB

Sets the time to reaccelerate from the speed when KEB function was deactivated to the set
frequency command (operation frequency before power loss).
When set to 0.0 s, the drive will accelerate to the previously active frequency according to the
active acceleration time set by any of C1-00, C1-02, C1-04 or C1-06.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P2-05 Acceleration Time after KEB 0.0 to 6000.0 s 0.3 s
<1>
<1> The setting range is determined by the units set in C1-09 (Acc./Dec. Time Unit Selection). When C1-09 = 0 (0.01
s), then the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).

 P2-07 KEB Detection Time

Sets the minimum duration of KEB operation once KEB is enabled ( P2-00 = 2 or 3). KEB will be
performed throughout this detection time even if power recovers within this duration. When
KEB is enabled or the multi-function input terminal assigned to KEB closes, and the main circuit
voltage falls below the P2-03 level, the drive continues to perform KEB within the detection
time set to this parameter. When P2-00 = 0 or 1, set a longer possible time to P2-07.
When the multi-function input terminal assigned to KEB is closed, the KEB operation will
continue after the detection time (P2-07). If the terminal is released, the drive will reaccelerate.
When KEB is not assigned to a multi-function input terminal and the main circuit voltage
exceeds the P2-08 setting after the detection time (P2-07), the drive reaccelerates. If the main
circuit voltage falls below the P2-08 setting after the detection time (P2-07), the KEB operation
continues.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P2-07 KEB Detection Time 0 to 2000 ms 50 ms

 P2-08 Voltage Target During KEB

Sets the target value for the main circuit DC voltage or to deactivate KEB.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P2-08 Voltage Target During KEB 150 to 400 V <1> <2>
<1> This value is for a 200 V drive. Double this value for a 400 V drive.
<2> This default is determined by d1-00.

172
<3> KEB will function properly, if the value of P2-08 is set to be greater than P2-03, do not set P2-03 higher than
P2-08

 P2-09 KEB Method Selection

To enable KEB, set P2-00=2 to 3 or close the assigned multi-function input terminal.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P2-09 KEB Method Selection 0 1, 2 0

0 : KEB Operation Method 1

Based on P2-04 (KEB Deceleartion Time), the drive adjusts the deceleration time during the
KEB operation to match P2-08 (Voltage Target During KEB). If power is restored within P2-07
time, the output frequency will keep the frequency of when power is restored
Note: When a Uv (Undervoltage) is triggered during KEB, set a shorter time to P2-04 (KEB Deceleration Time).
When an ov (Overvoltage) is triggered during KEB, set a longer time to P2-04 (KEB Deceleration Time).

1 : KEB Operation Method 2

The drive uses the time set to P2-04 (KEB Deceleration Time) to perform the KEB operation in
the P2-07 duration whether or not power is restored regardless the main circuit voltage. Install
a braking option as an ov (Overvoltage) might be triggered.

2 : KEB Operation Method 3

The drive uses the time set to P2-04 (KEB Deceleration Time) to perform the KEB operation and
monitors the main circuit voltage at the same time. If the main circuit voltage increases, the
drive holds the frequency to avoid ov (Overvoltage). Select this operation method when no
braking option is installed.
Refer to setting 56 KEB Command 1 (Normal Closed) and 57 KEB Command 1 (Normal Open)
of multi-function terminal inputs for details.

□ KEB Operation Start

The KEB function is triggered by the following conditions.

 The multi-function input terminal assigned to KEB closes.
 The main circuit voltage falls below the P2-03 level.

□ KEB Operation End

The KEB function is disabled by the following conditions.

 The multi-function input terminal assigned to KEB releases after the time set in P2-07 (KEB
Detection Time).
 When no multi-function input terminal is assigned to KEB and the voltage returns to the

173
 P2-08 level (Voltage Target During KEB) after the time set in P2-07 (KEB Detection Time).

Power loss time

Main power
supply

0V

Main circuit
voltage
P2-08 (Voltage Target During KEB)
P2-03 (Uv Detection Level)

0V
P2-07
(KEB Detection Time)

Output
frequency

P2-04
<1>
(KEB Deceleration Time)
0 Hz

Figure 6.75 KEB Opeartion Method 2 (P2-00=3 and P2-09=1 withoud Using Multi-Function Input for
KEB)

Note: After the time set to P2-07 ( KEB Detection Time), KEB continues if the voltage is still below the P2-08
(Voltage Target During KEB) level and KEB ends if the voltage exceeds the P2-08 level.
<1> When P2-05 = 0, the drive will accelerate to the previously active frequency according to the active
acceleration time set by any of C1-00, C1-02, C1-04 or C1-06.
Power loss time
Main power
supply

0V

Main circuit
voltage
P2-08 (Voltage Target During KEB)

P2-03 (Uv Detection Level)

0V
P2-07
(KEB Detection Time)

E1–口口=56 / 57 OFF ON OFF

(KEB Command 1)

Output
frequency
P2-04
(KEB Deceleration Time) <1>

0 Hz

Figure 6.76 KEB Opeartion Method 2 Using KEB Command 1 (P2-00 = 3, P2-09 = 1 and E1-口口=56,57)

Note: Whichever between voltage falling below the P2-03 level and entering KEB Command 1 occurs earlier

174
activates the KEB function.
<1> When P2-05=0, the drive accelerates to the previously active frequency according to the active acceleration
time set by any of C1-00, C1-02, C1-04 or C1-06. When P2-05≠0, the drive accelerates using the acceleration time
set to P2-05.

Figure 6.77 illustrates a wiring example to trigger KEB at the momentary power loss using terminal S6.

Braking resistor
(option)

B B
1 2
L1 R/L1 U/T1
Drive
L2 S/L2 V/T2 M
L3 T/L3 W/T3
Uv detection
relay

S6 (KEB Command 1 / 2)
S1 Run command
SC

Figure 6.77 KEB Function Wiring

Note:

1. Check if a Run command during power loss is enabled. When the Run command is removed, the drive cannot
accelerate to the frequency command even if the power is restored.
2. Install a braking resistor option when P2-09 = 1 ( KEB Operation Method 2).

 P2-10 Automatic voltage regulation

No. Name Setting Range Default

P2-10 Automatic voltage regulation 0, 1 1

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

P3 Stall Prevention

When the load is too heavy or the deceleration time is too short, the motor may not be able to
keep up with the frequency command and slips. The regenerative power from the power will
then exceed the tolerance of main circuit capacitor and trigger an ov (Overvoltage) fault to
stop the drive. This process is called “stall”. When a motor stalls, it cannot be accelerated or
decelerated. The Stall Prevention Function prevents the motor from stalling and while allowing
the motor to keep up with the desired speed without changing the acceleration or

175
deceleration times. This function can be set separately for acceleration, operating at constant
speeds, and deceleration.

 P3- 00 Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Sets the method to prevent the motor being stopped by oC(Overcurrent), oL1 (Motor
Overload) or oL2 (Drive Overload) fault.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P3-00 Stall Prevention during Acceleration 0 to 1 1

0 : Disabled

The Stall Prevention function is not provided during acceleration. If the acceleration time is too
short, the motor might not be able to be accelerated causing an overload fault and stop.

1 : Enabled

The Stall Prevention is enabled during acceleration. The operation is determined by the
selected control method.
· V/F Control / Open-Loop Vector Control
Acceleration stops when the output current exceeds the value set in P3-01. Acceleration
continues when the output current drops 15% below the value set in P3-01. The Stall
Prevention level is automatically decreased in the constant power range. Refer to P3-02 (Stall
Prevention Limit during Acceleration) for details..

Output current

Stall Prevention level

during acceleration
P3-01
85% of P3-01

Time
Output
P3-16 Stall Prevention P3-16 Stall Prevention
frequency
Detection Time Detection Time

Controls the output frequency to

prevent the motor from stalling

Time

Figure 6.78 Stall Prevention during Acceleration for IM motors

· PM Open-Loop Vector Control

176
When the output current is higher than the P3-01 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration)
level for longer than the time set to P3-16, the drive decelerates using P3-11 (Stall
Deceleration Time during Acceleration). Refer to P3-11 for detais.
The drive reaccelerates when the output current drops 15% below the value set in P3-01.

Output
current

P3-01 15% ofP3-01

Time
P3-16 Stall Prevention P3-16 Stall Prevention
Output Detection Time Detection Time
frequency

Time
Deceleration using P3-11

Figure 6.79 Stall Prevention during Acceleration for PM motors

 P3-01 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration

Sets the output current level to activate the Stall Prevention function during acceleration.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P3-01 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration 0 to 150% <1>
<1>
<1> The value is determined by A1-06 (ND/ HD Selection).

 When the motor rating is smaller than the drive rating, using the default to run the motor
could cause motor to stall. If the stall occurs, set a smaller to this parameter.
 Set P3-02 as well when running the motor in the constant power range.

 P3-02 Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration

when running the motor in the constant power range, the P3-01 value will be automatically
reduced.
Sets the lower limit of Stall Prevention in the constant power range as a percentage of the
drive rated output current.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P3-02 Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration 0 to 100% 50%

177
 Stall Prevention level
during acceleration
P3-01 (Stall Prevention during
Acc.)

P3-02 (Stall Prevention Limit

during Acc.)

Output frequency
d1-04
Base frequency

Figure 6.80 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration

 P3-03 Stall Prevention during Deceleration

The Stall Prevention function during deceleration controls the deceleration base on the main
circuit DC voltage, and use high inertia or rapid deceleration to prevent an ov (Overvoltage)
fault.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P3-03 Stall Prevention during Deceleration 0 to 1 1

0 : Disabled

The drive decelerates according to the set deceleration time. With high intertia loads or rapid
deceleration, an ov (Overvoltage) fault could be triggered. Therefore use braking options or
set this parameter to 1.

1 : Enabled

When the main circuit voltage exceeds the tall Prevention level during acceleration, the
deceleration pauses and hold the frequency. When the main circuit voltage falls below the Stall
Prevention level, the drive continues to decelerate using the set deceleration time. Stall
Prevention might be triggered repeatedly to prevent an overvoltage fault.
Stall Prevention might lengthen the total deceleration time until a completely stop. Therefore
install a braking option for applications such as conveyors.

The Stall Prevention function is illustrated below.

178
 Output frequency

Deceleration characteristics
when Stall Prevention is
triggered during deceleration

Time

Set deceleration time

Figure 6.81 Stall Prevention during Deceleration Operation

 P3-04 Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration

Sets the voltage level to activate the Stall Prevention function during deceleration.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P3-04 Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration 330V to 410V 395V <1>
<1>

When the regenerative power boosts the main circuit DC voltage higher than the value set to
this parameter during deceleration, the drive performs Stall Prevention during deceleration to
prevent an oV (Overvoltage) fault. Lower this value if the load is too heavy which causes a rapid
regenerative power increase.
<1> This value is for a 200 V AC drive. Double this value for a 400 V AC drive.

 P3-05 Stall Prevention during Run

Stall Prevention during run prevents an oL1 (Motor Overload) fault when the motor is running
at constant speed.

No. Name Setting Range Default

P3-05 Stall Prevention during Run 0 to 2 1
Note:
1. Available in Open-Loop V/F Control, Closed-Loop V/F Control and PM Open-Loop Vector Control control
methods.
2. Disable when the output frequency is below 6 Hz regardless the P3-05 and P3-06 settings.

0 : Disabled

The drive runs at the set frequency command. A heavy load might cause the motor too stall
and triggered an oC (Overcurrent) or oL1 (Motor Overload) to stop the motor.

1 : Enabled (Deceleration Time 1)

179
When the drive output current exceeds the P3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Run) level, the
deceleration time C1-01, C1-03, C1-05 or C1-07 will be used to decelerate. When the drive
output current falls below the value of P3-06 minus 2% for 100 ms, the drive accelerates back
to the frequency command at the active acceleration time.

2 : Enabled (Deceleration Time 2)

Same as P3-05 = 1 except the drive decelerates using the C1-03 deceleration time.

 P3-06 Stall Prevention Level during Run

Sets the current level to activate the Stall Prevention function during run.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P3-06 Stall Prevention Level during Run 30 to 150 <1>
<1> The default setting is determined by A1-06 (ND/HD Selection).

□ Using Analog Input to Change Stall Prevention Level during Run

If E3-□□= 7 (Stall Prevention Level during Run) is set, this value can be changed via input
terminal A1 or A2.
The Stall Prevention level during run is determined by the smaller value of the P3-06 setting or
the input via terminal A1 or A2.
Stall Prevention
level during run

100%

30%

Input of multi-
function analog input
0 3V 10 V terminal A1 or A2
( 4mA ) ( 8.8mA ) ( 20mA )

Figure 6.82 Using Analog Input to Change Stall Prevention Level during Run

 P3-07 to P3-10 Retain

P4 Frequency Detection

P4 parameters set the frequency agree and frequency detection to the assigned multi-function
output terminal.

 P4-00 / P4-01 Frequency Detection Level / Width

180
P4-00 sets the detection level for the multi-function output terminal assigned to E2-□□ = 2
(Frequency Agree), E2-□□=3 (User-Defined Frequency Agree), E2-□□=16 (Frequency Detection
1) or E2-□□=17 (Frequency Detection 2).
P4-01 Sets the detection width for the multi-function output terminal.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P4-00 Frequency Detection Level 0.0 to <1> 30.0 Hz
P4-01 Frequency Detection Width 0.1 to 25.5 Hz 2.0 Hz
<1> The upper limit is determined by the values set to d1-02 (Maximum Output Frequency), d1-13 (Motor 2
Maximum Output Frequency)and L2-00 (Frequency Command Upper Limit).

 P4-02 Frequency Command Loss Detection Selection

The drive can detection a frequency command loss from terminal A1 or A2. When the
frequency command falls below 90% of the command within the time set in P4-04, the
frequency command loss will be detected.

Analog frequency 100%

command

10%
P4-04

Frequency
command loss OFF ON
( E2-00 to E2-03
Time
=9 )

Figure 6.83 Frequency Command Loss Detection Operation

This parameter sets the drive operation when a frequency command loss is detected. Set
E2-00 to E2-03 to 9 (Frequency Command Loss) for the output terminal to trigger when
frequency command loss occurs.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P4-02 Frequency Command Loss Detection Selection 0,1 0

0 : Drive stop

The drive runs according to the frequency command.

1 : Continue operation according to the setting in P4-03.

181
The drive continues to run at the frequency set to P4-03 during frequency command loss.
When the frequency command is restored, the operation will be continued with the frequency
command.

 P4-03 Frequency Command at Frequency Command Loss

Sets the frequency command level at which the drive runs when detecting a frequency
command loss and when L4-02 is set to 1. Sets the value as a percentage of the maximum
output frequency set in d1-02. (Sets the value as a percentage of the motor 2 maximum output
frequency set in d1-13.)
No. Name Setting Range Default
P4-03 Frequency Command at Frequency Command 0.0 to 100.0% 80.0 %
Loss

 P4-04 Frequency Command Loss Detection Time

When the frequency command falls below 90% of the command within this detection time, the
frequency command loss will be detected.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P4-04 Frequency Command Loss Detection Time 20 to 400ms 20ms

 P4-05 Brake control release frequency

No. Name Setting Range Default

P4-05 Brake control release frequency 0.00 ~ 20.00Hz 0.00Hz

 P4-06 Brake control action frequency

No. Name Setting Range Default

P4-06 Brake control action frequency 0.00 ~ 20.00Hz 0.00Hz

P5 Fault Restart

Fault Restart tries to automatically restart the motor and continue operation to prevent the
motor from stopping when a fault is detected.

The drive diagnoses itself and continues operation when a fault is detected during run. If the
self-diagnosis is successful to clear the fault, the drive restarts automatically with Speed Search.
Refer to b3 (Speed Search) for details.
Note:
1. The Run command (forward/ reverse) will automatically be removed when the sequency control circuit makes the
fault shut off the drive output.
2. When the Run command is removed, the drive diagnoses itself, attemps to clear the fault and restart.

182
WARNING! Do not perform Fault Restart in applications such as lifting, which could cause the machine to drop the
load.

Fault Restart can be performed when the following faults occur.

Fault Fault Name Fault Fault Name

GF Ground Fault OL2 Drive Overload
OVA Overvoltage (Acceleration) Ot1 Overload Detection 1
OVD Overvoltage (Deceleration) Ot2 Overload Detection 2
OVC Overvoltage (Constant Speed) PF Input Phase Loss

oCA Overcurrent (Acceleration) LF1 Output Phase Loss

oCD Overcurrent (Deceleration)
oCC Overcurrent (Constant Speed)
OH Heatsink Overheat
OL1 Motor Overload
Set Fault Restart in P5-00 to P5-03.
Set E2-00 to E2-03 to 14 (Fault Start) to output the signal to an external devices.

 P5-00 Number of Auto Restart Attempts

Sets the number of times to automatically attempt to restart the drive when detecting the fault
listed above. The drive will stop operation when the restart attemps reach the number set in
this parameter. Clear the cause of the fault manually and restart the drive.
The number of auto restart attemps is reset to 0 in the following situations.
· The drive runs normally for 10 minutes after a fault restart.
· A fault is reset manually after the protection function is triggered.
· The power supply is cycled.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P5-00 Number of Auto Restart Attempts 0 to 10 0

 P5- 01 Auto Restart Fault Output Operation

Enables or disables the fault output via E2-□□= 11 (Fault) during Fault Restart.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P5-01 Auto Restart Fault Output Operation 0, 1 0

0 : Fault Output Disabled

1 : Fault Output Enabled

 P5-02 Fault Restart Interval Time

Sets the amount of time between restart attempts.

183
 No. Name Setting Range Default
P5-02 Fault Restart Interval Time 0.5 to 600.0 s 10.0 s

P6 Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection

When the load is too heavy (overload) or suddenly drops ( undertorque), the drive will output a
torque detection signal to the multi-function output terminal ( Relay 1, Relay 2, D1-DC or
D2-DC). The torque detection function is set by P6 parameters.

CAUTION! When overtorque occurs, the drive may trigger the fault to stop the motor. To prevent the drive from

stopping, use torque detection to indicate an overload situation before the fault is triggered. Simimar situations
also apply to undertorque. Use undertorque detection to find out application problems such as torn belte, a pump
shutting off and etc.

E2-00 to E2-03 Setting Name

18 Overvoltage/ Undervoltage Detection 1 (normal open)
20 Overvoltage/ Undervoltage Detection 2 (normal open)

Overtorque and undertorque operations are illustrated in Figure 6.84 and Figure 6.85.

Motor current/
torque
Hysteresis Hysteresis
( 10% ) ( 10% )
P6-01 or P6-04

P6-02 or P6- P6-02 or P6-

05 05

Torque detection 1
or 2 ON ON

Figure 6.84 Overtorque Detection Operation

Motor current/
torque
Hysteresis
( 10% )

P6-01 or P6-04

P6-02 or P6- P6-02 or P6-

05 05

Torque detection 1 or
2
ON ON

Figure 6.85 Undertorque Detection Operation

184
Note:
1. A 10% of the drive rated current and motor rated torque are used for the torque detection function.
2. Overtorque/ undertorque detection is set as a percentage of the drive rated output current in Open-Loop V/F
Control, Closed-Loop V/F Control, and PM Open-Loop Vector Control control methods. Overtorque/ undertorque
detection is set as a percentage of the motor rated torque in Open-Loop Vector Control, Closed-Loop Vector
Control, and PM Closed-Loop Vector Control control methods.

 P6-00 Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection Selection 1

Sets the operation when the motor current or torque exceeds the P6-01 level for longer than
the time set to P6-02.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P6-00 Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection Selection 1 0 to 8 0

0 : Disabled

1 : Overtorque Alarm at Speed Agree

Overtorque detection is active only when the output frequency is the same as the frequency
command. No detection during acceleration or deceleration. The drive continues to run after
an ot1 (Overtorque Detection 1) alarm is triggered.

2 : Overtorque Alarm at Run

Overtorque detection is active when the Run command is active. The drive continues to run
after an ot1 (Overtorque Detection 1) alarm is triggered.

3 : Overtorque Fault at Speed Agree

Overtorque detection is active only when the output frequency is the same as the frequency
command. No detection during acceleration or deceleration. The drive stops operation after
an ot1 (Overtorque Detection 1) fault is triggered.

4 : Overtorque Fault at Run

Overtorque detection is active when the Run command is active. The drive stops operation
after an ot1 (Overtorque Detection 1) fault is triggered.

5 : Undertorque Alarm at Speed Agree

Undertorque detection is active only when the output frequency is the same as the frequency
command. No detection during acceleration or deceleration. The drive continues to run after
an Ut1 (Undertorque Detection 1) alarm is triggered.

6 : Undertorque Alarm at Run

185
Undertorque detection is active when the Run command is active. The drive continues to run
after an Ut1 (Undertorque Detection 1) alarm is triggered.

7 : Undertorque Fault at Speed Agree

Undertorque detection is active only when the output frequency is the same as the frequency
command. No detection during acceleration or deceleration. The drive stops operation after
an Ut1 (Undertorque Detection 1) fault is triggered.

8 : Undertorque Fault at Run

Undertorque detection is active when the Run command is active. The drive stops operation
after an Ut1 (Overtorque Detection 1) fault is triggered.

 P6-01 Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection Level 1

Sets the level for overtorque/undertorque detection

Overtorque/ undertorque detection is set as a percentage of the drive rated output current in
Open-Loop V/F Control, Closed-Loop V/F Control, and PM Open-Loop Vector Control control
methods. Overtorque/ undertorque detection is set as a percentage of the motor rated torque
in Open-Loop Vector Control, Closed-Loop Vector Control, and PM Closed-Loop Vector
Control control methods.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P6-01 Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection Level 1 0 to 300% 150%
Note: This level can be set by the analog input terminal assigned to E3-□□=11. The analog input overrides the
setting in this parameter. However P6-04 (Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection Level 2) cannot be set by the analog
input terminal.

 P6-02 Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection Time 1

Sets the time for overtorque/undertorque detection 1.

No. Name Setting Range Default
P6-02 Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection Time 1 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 s

 P6-06 Mechanical Weakening Detection Operation

Sets the speed range to detect mechanical weakening and the operation when detected.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P6-06 Mechanical Weakening Detection Operation 0 to 8 0

0 : Disabled

1 : Continue Operation if the Speed (Signed) is above P6-07

186
When the speed (signed) exceeds the P6-07 level, an oL (Mechanical Weakening Overtorque
Detection) alarm will be triggered and the drive will continue operation.

2 : Continue Operation if the Speed (Unsigned) is above P6-07

When the speed (unsigned) exceeds the P6-07 level, an oL (Mechanical Weakening
Overtorque Detection) alarm will be triggered and the drive will continue operation.

3 : Stop Operation if the Speed (Signed) is above P6-07

When the speed (signed) exceeds the P6-07 level, an oL (Mechanical Weakening Overtorque
Detection) fault will be triggered and the drive will stop operation.

4 : Stop Operation if the Speed (Unsigned) is above P6-07

When the speed (unsigned) exceeds the P6-07 level, an oL (Mechanical Weakening
Overtorque Detection) fault will be triggered and the drive will stop operation.

5 : Continue Operation if the Speed (Signed) is below P6-07

When the speed (signed) is below the P6-07 level, an UL (Mechanical Weakening Undertorque
Detection) alarm will be triggered and the drive will continue operation.

6 : Continue Operation if the Speed (Unsigned) is below P6-07

When the speed (unsigned) is below the P6-07 level, an UL (Mechanical Weakening
Undertorque Detection) alarm will be triggered and the drive will continue operation.

7 : Stop Operation if the Speed (Signed) is below P6-07

When the speed (signed) is below the P6-07 level, an UL (Mechanical Weakening Undertorque
Detection) fault will be triggered and the drive will stop operation.

8 : Stop Operation if the Speed (Unsigned) is below P6-07

When the speed (unsigned) is below the P6-07 level, an UL (Mechanical Weakening
Undertorque Detection) fault will be triggered and the drive will stop operation.

 P6-07 Mechanical Weakening Detection Speed Level

Sets the speed level for Mechanical Weakening Detection as a percentage of d1-02 (Maximum
Output Frequency).
No. Name Setting Range Default
P6-07 Mechanical Weakening Detection Speed Level -110.0 to 110.0%
110.0%
The drive detects Mechanical Weakening by th settings of P6-00 to P6-02. When P6-06 is

187
set for unsigned speed detection, the negative values are treated as positive values.

 P6-08 Mechanical Weakening Detection Time

If the condition set in P6-06 lasts the time set in this parameter, Mechanical Weakening is
detected.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P6-08 Mechanical Weakening Detection Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 s

 P6-09 Mechanical Weakening Detection Start Time

Sets the cumulative drive operation time to activate Mechanical Weakening Detection. If U3-00
reaches the value set in this parameter, Mechanical Weakening is detected.
No. Name Setting Range Default

P7 Drive Protection

 P7-00 Input Phase Loss Protection

Enables or disables the input phase loss detection.

No. Name Setting Range Default
P7-00 Input Phase Loss Protection 0, 1 0

0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

When a power supply voltage is imbalance or main circuit capacitor is weakening, the input
phase loss will be detected and a PF (Phase Loss) fault will be triggered.

The detection is disabled in the following situations.

· The drive is decelerating

· No Run command is entered
· Output current is below or equal to 30% of the drive rated current

 P7-01 Output Phase Loss Protection

Sets the output phase loss detection. The output phase loss will be detected when the output
current is less than 5% of the drive rated output current.
Note:
1. If the motor rated current is too small compared with the drive rating, output phase loss detection may be
mistakenly triggered. Set P7-01 to 0 (disabled) in this situation .
2. Output phase loss detection is not provided when the drive is running a PM motor with light load.

188
 No. Name Setting Range Default
P7-01 Output Phase Loss Protection 0 to 2 0

0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled when One Phase is Lost

A LF1 (Output Phase Loss) fault is triggered when one output phase is lost. The drive output is
cut off and the motor coasts to stop.

2 : Enabled when Two Phases are Lost

A LF1 (Output Phase Loss) fault is triggered when more than one output phases are lost. The
drive output is cut off and the motor coasts to stop.

 P7-02 Output Ground Fault Detection

Enables or disables the output ground fault detection.

No. Name Setting Range Default <1>
P7-02 Output Ground Fault Detection 0, 1 0

0 : Disabled

No gound fault detection.

1 : Enabled

A GF (Ground Fault) fault is triggered when a ground short circuit or high leakage current
occurs in one or two output phases.

 P7-03 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation

Sets the heatsink cooling fan operation.

No. Name Setting Range Default
P7-03 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation 0 to 2 0

0 : Enabled when drive is running

The fan is switched on when a Run command is entered and switchef off with the wait time set
to P7-04 after removing the Run command. This setting can be used to extend the fan lifetime.

1 : Enabled when power supply is On

2 : When the heat sink temperature is reached, the fan starts running

The fan operates as long as the power is supplied to the AC drive.

189
 P7-04 Heatsink Cooling Fan Off-Delay Time

Sets the cooling fan off-delay time when P7-03=0 that the drive waits to disabled the cooling
fan after run command is released.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P7-04 Heatsink Cooling Fan Off-Delay Time 0 to 300 s 60 s

 P7-05 Ambient Temperature Setting

Sets the ambient temperature. This automatically decreases the drive rated current when the
ambient temperature is higher than the temperature specified in drive specifications. The
installation method is required to be set in P7-12. Refer to Ch 10.1 on page 261 for details.
No. Name Setting Range Default
P7-05 Ambient Temperature Setting -10 to 50° 40°

 P7-06 oL2 Detection Time Reduction at Low Speed

Determines whether to reduce the oL2 (Drive Overload) fault detection time at low speed
(below 6 Hz) to prevent premature output transistor failures.
Note: Contact Lite-On for consultation before disabling the protection by setting 0 to this parameter.

No. Name Setting Range Default

P7-06 oL2 Detection Time Reduction at Low 0, 1 0
Speed

0 : Detection time is not reduced

The oL2 (Drive Overload) fault detection time is not reduced at low speed (below 6 Hz). Runing
the drive with high output current at low speed could damage the output transistor.

1 : Detection time is reduced

The oL2 (Drive Overload) fault detection time is reduced at low speed (below 6 Hz).

 P7-11 High Current Alarm Setting

Enables or disables the High Current Alarm (HCA) when the output current is too high.

No. Name Setting Range Default

P7-11 High Current Alarm Setting 0, 1 0

0 : Disabled (No Alarm)

No alarm will be triggered.

1 : Enabled (Alarm)

190
When the output current is higher than 150% (ND mode is 120%) of the drive rated current,
the alarm will be triggered and the assigned multi-function input terminal (E2-□□= 13) will
close.

 P7-12 Installation Method Selection

Selects the installation type. The drive overload detection limit will be changed according to
the selection. Refer to Ch 10.1 on page 261 for details.
Note:
1. This value cannot be reset by A1-03 (Reset).
2. The default value is preset to the appropriate value. Do not change this value unless using side-by-side
installation or mounting the drive with the heatsink outside the cabinet.

No. Name Setting Range Default <1><2><3>

P7-12 Installation Method Selection 0 to 2 0

0 : IP20 Enclosure in a Cabinet

Select this when the IP20 enclosure drive is installed in a cabinet with at least 30 mm room to
the next drive or a cabinet wall.

1 : Side-by-Side Mounting

Select this when the drive is mounted side-by-side with 2 mm to 29 mm room to the next
drive.

2 : NEMA 1 Enclosure

Select this when the NEMA 1 enclosure drive is installed.

 P7- 13 DC Braking Level Setting

Sets the DC braking transistor level.

No. Name Setting Range Default
P7-13 DC Braking Level Setting 330V to 400 V <1> 350 V <1>
<1> The value is for a 200V AC drive. Double this value for a 400V AC drive.

6.8 Group n, Special Adjustments

n1 Hunting Prevention

Hunting Prevention prevents the drive from hunting when running with low inertia and light
load. Hunting often occurs with a high carrier frequency and a low output frequency (below 30
Hz).

191
 n1- 00 Hunting Prevention Setting

Enables or disables the hunting prevention function.

Note: This function is only provided in V/F Control. When drive response is prioritized over suppressing motor
oscillation, disable Hunting Prevention. This function can be disabled without problems in applications with high
inertia loads or heavy loads.

No. Name Setting Range Default

n1-00 Hunting Prevention Setting 0, 1 1

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

 n1- 01 Hunting Prevention Gain

Sets the gain for Hunting Prevention.

No. Name Setting Range Default
n1-01 Hunting Prevention Gain 0.00 to 2.50 1.00

Normally there is no need to change this setting. However, change the setting in the following
situations.
· If the motor oscillates during light load, gradually increase this value by units of 0.1
· If the motor stalls, gradually decrease this value by units of 0.1

6.9 Group o, Keypad Function Settings

o1 Display Setting

 o1- 00 Frequency Command Setting/Display

o1-00 used to select the frequency command unit and monitor values. o1-00 = 3 and under
o1-02 and o1-03, the unit can be set to any。
No. Name Setting Range Default
o1-00 Frequency Command 0 ～ 3 0
Setting/Display

0 ：Use units of 0.01Hz

1 ：Use units of 0.01%（100% as maximum output frequency）

2 ：Use units of min-1 （automatically calculated by maximum output frequency and number

192
of motor poles）

3 ：Use user-defined units（defined by o1-02 and o1-03）

When the value of the maximum output frequency to be displayed with the o1-02 setting.
Digits after the decimal point is set by o1-03.
For example, when the maximum output frequency to be displayed when "200.00", can be set
as follows.
o1-02 = 20000
o1-03 = 2

 o1- 01 Retain

 o1- 02 User-Defined Frequency Command Setting/Display

Setpoint at maximum output frequency to be displayed。

No. Name Setting Range Default
o1-02 User-Defined Frequency Command 1 ～ 60000 Setting as o1-00
Setting/Display

 o1- 03 Frequency Command Setting/Display Decimal Places

Setting frequency command setting/display decimal places

No. Name Setting Range Default
o1-03 Frequency Command Setting/Display Decimal 0 ～ 3 Setting as o1-00
Places

o2 Multi-Function Selection

o2 parameters determine the functions assigned to the keys on the keypad.

 o2-00 LO/RE (LOCAL/REMOTE) Key Function Selection

Enables or disables LO/RE key on the keypad

No. Name Setting Range Default
o2-00 LO/RE (LOCAL/REMOTE) Key Function Selection 0, 1 1

0 : Disabled

Switches between Local and Remote are disabled.

193
1 : Enabled

Switches between Local and Remote Operation but only during drive stop. Switching is not
possible when entering a Run command. When Local mode is selected, the LED indicator on
the LO/RE will light up.

WARNING! Pay attention to the following situations when b1-05 (Run Command Action after Switch ) is set to 1
(Accept Active Run Command at the New Source).
If a run command at the new source is active, the drive will accept it and run the motor immediately right after
switching from the old source to the new source. Clear all personnel from the electrical connections and the running
machinery prior to switching command sources. Failure to comply could cause serious injury.

Refer to Table 6.22 for the relationship between o2- 00 and b1- 05.

Table 6.22 Relationship between LO/RE and b1-05

o2-00 b1-05 Switch from Local to Remote Switch from Remote to Local
0 Not possible to switch Not possible to switch
0
1 Not possible to switch Not possible to switch
The drive will not run until a new Run
0 Not possible to run
command is enterd.
1 If a Run command is entered, the drive
1 will start running as soon as the LO/RE Not possible to run
key is pressed.

 o2-01 STOP Key Function Selection

Determines if the STOP key on the keypad will stop the drive when Remote is selected as the
command source.
No. Name Setting Range Default
o2-01 STOP Key Function Selection 0, 1 1
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

The STOP key always stops drive operation even if the command source is not set to the
keypad. To restart the drive,cycle the Run command if the drive has been stopped by pressing
the STOP key.

 o2-02 Retain

 o2-03 Drive Capacity Selection

Set this parameter after replacing the terminal block or drive modules.

194
CAUTION! An incorrect o2- 03 setting may cause the drive performance to suffer and drive damage.
No. Name Setting Range Default
o2-03 Drive Capacity Selection - Determined by
drive capacity

Rating (kW)
0.25 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11
(200V series)

o2-03 Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Rating (kW)
15 18.5 22 30 37 45
(200V series)

o2-03 Setting 9 10 11 12 13 14

Rating (kW)
0.25 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11
(400V Series)

o2-03 Setting 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Rating (kW)
15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
(400V Series)

o2-03 Setting 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

 o2-04 ENTER Key Function During Frequency Command Setting

Determines whether the ENTER key is required to be pressed after changing the frequency
command using the keypad in Local mode.
No. Name Setting Range Default
o2-04 ENTER Key Function During Frequency Command 0,1 0
Setting

0 : ENTER Key Required

The ENTER key is required to be pressed to trigger the frequency command.

1 : ENTER Key Not Required

When entering a frequency command, the output frequency changes immediately by UP or

DOWN key without pressing ENTER. The frequency command will be saved 5 seconds after it is
changed by pressing the UP or DOWN key.

 o2- 05 Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected

Determines whether the drive will stop when the digital operator is removed in LOCAL mode

195
or when b1-01 or b1-08 is set to 0. When the operator is reconnected, the display will indicate
that it was disconnected.

No. Name Setting Range Default

o2-05 Operation Selection when Digital Operator is 0,1 0
Disconnected

0 ：Continue Operation
The operation continues
1 ：Trigger a Fault
The operation stops and triggers an oPr fault. The motor coasts to stop

 o2-06 Operation Direction at Power Up when Using Keypad

Determines the motor rotating direction after the drive power up and the Run command is
entered from the digital operator.
Note: This parameter is provided only in Local mode when b1-01=0 or b1-08 = 0 (Keypad).
No. Name Setting Range Default
o2-06 Operation Direction at Power Up when Using Keypad 0, 1 0
0 : Forward
1 : Reverse

o4 Maintenance Settings

 o4-00 Cumulative Operation Time Setting

Sets the initial value by 10 hours to start keeping track of cumulative operation time. The
cumulative operation time can be viewed in U3-00.
Note: A setting of 20 will set the cumulative operation time to 200h and the monitor will display 200h in U3-00.

No. Name Setting Range Default

o4-00 Cumulative Operation Time Setting 0 to 6000 h 0h

 o4-01 Cumulative Operation Time Selection

Selects the conditions in which the drive keeps track of the cumulative operation time.
No. Name Setting Range Default
o4-01 Cumulative Operation Time Selection 0, 1 0

0 ∶ Time of Power On

Keeps track of time from the power up to power cutoff.

1 ∶ Time of Run

196
Keeps track of time when the output voltage is active.

 o4-02 Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting

Sets the initial value to start keeping track of cumulative fan operation time. View the
cumulative fan operation time in U3-01. Reset this value to 0 after the fan replacement.
Note:
1. Set this value in units of 10 h. A setting of 20 will set the cumulative operation time to 200h and the monitor will
display 300h in U3-00.
2. The cooling fan may require maintenance at an earlier date in harsher environments.

No. Name Setting Range Default

o4-02 Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting 0 to 6000 h 0h

 o4-03 to o4-05 Retain

 o4-06 U2 Reset Setting

Resets the data for U2-□□ (Fault Information) as this data will not be reset by A1-03 (Reset).
No. Name Setting Range Default
o4-06 U2 Reset Setting 0,1 0

0 : No Action

The data for the U2-□□ (Fault Information) monitor will not be reset.

1 : Enabled

Resets the data for the U2-□□ (Fault Information) monitor. Set this value to 1 and press ENTER
will clear all the fault information to 0.

 o4- 07 kWh Monitor Initialization

Manually resets kWh monitors U3-08 and U3-09. Initializing the drive or cycling the power will
not reset these monitors.
No. Name Setting Range Default
o4-07 kWh Monitor Initialization 0,1 0

0 ：No Action

The kWh data (U3-08、 U3-09) are maintained

1 ：Reset kWh Data

Resets the kWh counter. The monitors U3-08 and U3-09 will display “0” after they are
initialized. Setting o4-07 to 1 and pressing the ENTER erases kWh data and returns the display
197
to 0.

6.10 Group t, Auto-Tuning

t1 IM Motor Auto-Tuning

t1 parameters set the data for IM motor Auto-Tuning

Note: When running variable speed motors or vector motors, the voltage or frequency may be lower than
general-purpose motors. Therefore set the motor data according to the motor nameplate and perform
Auto-Tuning. After that, change the maximum output frequency in d1-02.

 t1-01 Auto-Tuning Method Selection

Selects the method of Auto-Tuning..

No. Name Setting Range Default
t1-01 Auto-Tuning Method Selection 0,1,2 0

0 : Rotational Auto-Tuning

1 : Stationary Auto-Tuning 1

2 : Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance

 t1-02 Motor Output Power

Sets the motor rated output power in kW units.

No. Name Setting Range Default
t1-02 Motor Output Power 0.00 to 650.00 kW Determined by o2-03, A1-06
Note:
1. The maximum motor rating the drive can run changes depending on the A1-06 (ND/HD Selection) setting.

2. 1HP (Horse Power) = 0.746kW

 t1-03 Motor Rated Voltage

Sets the motor rated voltage according to the motor nameplate. If the motor is operating
above base speed, enter the voltage base speed here.

Variable speed motors and vector motors may have lower voltage or frequency than the
general-purpose ones. Therefore make sure the data entered matches the motor test report.
Enter the no-load voltage in this parameter for better control precision. If the motor test report

198
or the nameplate data is not available, set approximately 90% of the motor rated voltage.

If the drive input voltage is low, set approximately 90% of the drive input voltage. This may
increase the output current and reduce the overload margin.

No. Name Setting Range Default

t1-03 Motor Rated Voltage 0.0 to 255.5 V 200.0 V <1>
<1>

<1> This value is for a 200 V drive. Double this value for a 400 V drive.

 t1-04 Motor Rated Current

Sets the motor rated current according to the motor nameplate. Set the motor rated current
between 50% and 100% of the drive rated current for optimal performance. Enter the current
at the motor base speed.
No. Name Setting Range Default
t1-04 Motor Rated Current 10 to 200% of drive d2-10 ( d2-21)
rated current
Note: The setting range changes depending on the settings of o2-03 (Drive Capacity Selection )and A1-06(ND/HD
Selection的.

 t1-05 Motor Base Frequency

Sets the motor base frequency according to the motor nameplate. Enter the maximum
frequency to d1-02 (d1-13 for motor 2) after Auto-Tuning if a motor with an extended speed
range is used or the motor is used in the field weakening area.
No. Name Setting Range Default
t1-05 Motor Base Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 50.0

 t1-06 Number of Motor Poles

Sets the number of motor poles according to the motor nameplate.

No. Name Setting Range Default
t1-06 Number of Motor Poles 2 to 48 4

 t1-07 Motor Base Speed

Sets the motor base speed according to the motor nameplate.

No. Name Setting Range Default
t1-07 Motor Base Speed 0 to 24000 rpm 1450 rpm

 t1-09 Motor No-Load Current (Stationary Auto-Tuning)

Sets the no-load current for the motor. After the motor output power and rated current are set
199
in t1-02 and t1-04, this parameter will automatically display the no-load current of a standard
motor. The no-load current must be entered according to the motor test report.
No. Name Setting Range Default
t1-09 Motor No-Load Current 0.0 A to (t1-04)( Max ∶ -
(Stationary Auto-Tuning) 0 to 2999.9)
1. Note: The maximum motor rating the drive can run changes depending on the A1-06 (ND/HD Selection)
setting. Refer to Ch 2.4 on page 15.

 t1-10 Retain

 t1-11 Retain

 t1-12 Motor Auto-Tuning Setting

Enables or disables Auto-Tuning when A1-02=0 to 3.

No. Name Setting Range Default
t1-12 Motor Auto-Tuning Setting 0,1 0

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Enables the motor Auto-Tuning. Set t1-12 to 1 and press the ENTER key to switch the display
to the motor Auto-Tuning preparation (tUnxx). The last two letters changes depending on the
selected motor (motor 1 or 2) and t1-01 setting.

Press the MENU key to cancel Auto-Tuning and leave this display or press the RUN key to start
the motor Auto-Tuning function.

The display flashes in process and shows “End” after Auto-Tuning is completed. If
Auto-Tuning fails, the process stops immediately and shows “tnFxx” on the screen which
“xx” indicates the problems. Refer to Chapter 8.4 Auto-Tuning for more details.

When the Auto-Tuning function is required to be controlled by the keypad, set b1-01(Run
Command Selection 1) to 0 (Keypad). Otherwise Auto-Tuning cannot be started by pressing
the RUN key.
.

200
6.11 Group U, Monitor Settings

U parameters views the data concerning drive operation.

Parameter Name Description Unit

Group U, Monitor Settings

U1: Status Monitors

0: V/F Control
U1-00 Control Method -
1: SVVCl
Frequency Displays the frequency command. (Display units are defined
U1-01 -
Command by o1-00)
Displays the output frequency. (Display units are defined by
U1-02 Output Frequency -
o1-00)
U1-03 Output Current Displays output current. 0.01A
U1-04 Motor Speed Displays the motor speed. -
Output Voltage
U1-05 Displays the drive output voltage command. 0.1V
Command
Main Circuit DC
U1-06 Displays the main circuit DC voltage. 0.1V
Voltage
U1-07 Output Power Displays the internal output power calculated by the drive. 0.001kW
Displays the status of the input terminal.
U1-09=C11111111:
The following indicate each digit from right to left.
1:Digital Input 1 (S1 enabled )
1:Digital Input 2 (S2 enabled )
U1-09 Input Terminal Status -
1:Digital Input 3 (S3 enabled )
1:Digital Input 4 (S4 enabled )
1:Digital Input 5 (S5 enabled )
1:Digital Input 6 (S6 enabled )
1:Digital Input 7 (S7 enabled )
Displays the status of the output terminal.
Output Terminal U1-10=o1111:
U1-10 -
Status The following indicate each digit from right to left.
Multi-Function Terminal Output (terminal R1A/R1B-R1C)

201
Parameter Name Description Unit
Multi-Function Terminal Output (terminal R2A –R2C)
Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 1 (terminal D1)
Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 2 (terminal D2)
Displays the status of the drive operation.
U1-11=11111111
The following indicate each digit from right to left.
1:During Run
1:During Zero Speed Holding
Drive Operation
U1-11 1:During Reverse -
Status
1:During Fault Reset Signal Input
1:During Speed Agree
1:Drive Ready
1:During Alarm Detection
1:During Fault Detection
Terminal A1 Input
U1-12 Displays the terminal A1 input voltage. 0.1%
Voltage
Terminal A2 Input
U1-13 Displays the terminal A2 input voltage. 0.1%
Voltage
Output Frequency
U1-14 Displays output frequency with ramp time and S-curves. 0.01 Hz
after Soft Starter
U1-15 Input Pulse Monitor Displays the frequency to pulse input. 1Hz
U1-16 Software Version Displays the software version. -

U2: Fault Information

U2-00 Current Fault Displays the current fault. -

st
U2-01 1 Most Recent Fault Displays the first most recent fault. -
nd
2 Most Recent
U2-02 Displays the second most recent fault. -
Fault
U2-03 3rd Most Recent Fault Displays the third most recent fault. -
th
U2-04 4 Most Recent Fault Displays the fourth most recent fault. -
Frequency
Displays the frequency command at the first most recent
U2-05 Command at 1st -
fault.
Most Recent Fault
Output Frequency at
U2-06 st
Displays the output frequency at the first most recent fault. -
1 Most Recent Fault
U2-07 Output Current at 1st Displays the output current at the first most recent fault. 0.01A

202
Parameter Name Description Unit
Most Recent Fault
st
Motor Speed at 1
U2-08 Displays the motor speed at the first most recent fault. -
Most Recent Fault
Output Voltage
st
Displays the output voltage command at the first most recent
U2-09 command at 1 0.1V
fault.
Most Recent Fault
Main Circuit DC
st
Displays the main circuit DC voltage at the first most recent
U2-10 Voltage at 1 Most 0.1V
fault.
Recent Fault
Input Terminal Status
st
Displays the input terminal status at the first most recent
U2-13 at 1 Most Recent -
fault. (Same status display as U1-09)
Fault
Output Terminal
Displays the output terminal status at the first most recent
U2-14 Status at 1st Most -
fault. (Same status display as U1-10)
Recent Fault
Operation Status at Displays the operation status at the first most recent fault.
U2-15 -
1st Most Recent Fault (Same status display as U1-11)
Cumulative
Displays the cumulative operation time when the first fault
U2-17 Operation Time at 1h
occurred
1st Fault
Frequency -
nd
Displays the frequency command at the second most recent
U2-19 Command at 2
fault.
Most Recent Fault
Output Frequency at
nd
Displays the output frequency at the second most recent
U2-20 2 Most Recent -
fault.
Fault
Output Current at
U2-21 2nd Most Recent Displays the output current at the second most recent fault. 0.01A
nd
Fault 2
Motor Speed at 2nd
U2-22 Displays the motor speed at the second most recent fault. -
Most Recent Fault
Output Voltage
Displays the output voltage command at the second most
U2-23 command at 2nd 0.1V
recent fault.
Most Recent Fault
Main Circuit DC Displays the main circuit DC voltage at the second most
U2-24 nd
0.1V
Voltage at 2 Most recent fault.

203
Parameter Name Description Unit
Recent Fault
Input Terminal Status
nd
Displays the input terminal status at the second most recent
U2-27 at 2 Most Recent -
fault. (Same status display as U1-09)
Fault
Output Terminal
nd
Displays the output terminal status at the second most recent
U2-28 Status at 2 Most -
fault. (Same status display as U1-10)
Recent Fault
Operation Status at
nd
Displays the operation status at the second most recent fault.
U2-29 2 Most Recent -
(Same status display as U1-11)
Fault
Cumulative
Displays the cumulative operation time when the second fault
U1-31 Operation Time at 1h
occurred
2nd Fault
U2-33 Current Alarm Displays the current alarm. -
st
1 Most Recent
U2-34 Displays the first most recent alarm. -
Alarm
2nd Most Recent
U2-35 Displays the second most recent alarm. -
Alarm
3rd Most Recent
U2-36 Displays the third most recent alarm. -
Alarm
4th Most Recent
U2-37 Displays the fourth most recent alarm. -
Alarm

U3: Maintenance Monitors

Displays the cumulative operation time for the drive. The

initial value is determined by o4-00. Keeping track of time
Cumulative Drive
U3-00 from run or power up is determined by o4-01. The maximum 1h
Operation Time
number displayed is 60000, after which the value will be
counted from 0.
Displays the cumulative operation time for the cooling fan.
Cumulative Cooling The initial value is determined by o4-02. The maximum
U3-01 1h
Fan Operation Time number displayed is 60000, after which the value will be
counted from 0.
Heatsink
U3-06 Displays the heatsink temperature. 1℃
Temperature
U3-07 LED Check Lights all segments of the LED to verify that the display is

204
Parameter Name Description Unit
working properly
Monitors the drive cumulative output power usage. The value
U3-08 kWh, Lower 4 Digits is shown as a 9-digit number displayed across two monitors

U3-08 and U3-09.

Example: 12345678.9 kWh is displayed as:
U3-09 kWh, Upper 5 Digits U3-08: 678.9 kWh

U9-09: 12345 MWh

U3-10 Peak Hold Current Displays the peak current value during operation 0.01A
Peak Hold Output Displays the output frequency when the peak current
U3-11 -
Frequency displayed in U3-10 occurred.
Motor Overload Displays the value of the motor overload detection
U3-12 1%
Estimate (oL1) accumulator. An oL1 will be triggered when reaching 100%.
Displays the source for the frequency command as XY-nn.
X: Command Used
1: Command 1
2: Command 2
Y-nn: Frequency Command Source
0-01: Keypad
Frequency
1-01: Analog input (Terminal AI 1)
U3-13 Command Source -
1-02: Analog input (Terminal AI 2)
Selection
2-02 to 2-16: Multi-step speed command
2-17: Jog frequency command
3-01: PID frequency command
4-01: Terminal UP/ DOWN
5-01: Modbus communication
6-01: Pulse train command
Displays the source for the frequency command as XY-nn.
XY-nn=00-00: Local
X: Command Used
1: Command 1
Run Command
U3-14 2: Command 2 -
Source Selection
Y-nn: Command Source
0-00: Keypad
0-01: Control Circuit Terminal (Sequence Control Input)
0-02: Modbus communication
Drive Overload Displays the value of the drive overload detection
U3-17 1%
Estimate (oL2) accumulator. An oL2 will be triggered when reaching 100%.
205
Parameter Name Description Unit

U4: PID Monitors

Displays the PID feedback value as a percentage of the

U4-00 PID Feedback 0.01%
maximum output frequency.
Displays the PID input value as a percentage of the maximum
U4-01 PID Input 0.01%
output frequency.
Displays the PID output value as a percentage of the
U4-02 PID Output 0.01%
maximum output frequency.
Displays the PID target value as a percentage of the maximum
U4-03 PID Target 0.01%
output frequency.
PID Differential Displays the difference of both feedback values when 10 is set
U4-04 0.01%
Feedback to both E3-01 and E3-07.
Displays the adjusted feedback value if differential feedback is
used (U4-00 to U4-04)
U4-05 PID Feedback 2 0.01%
The value in U4-00 and U4-05 will be the same if differential
feedback is not used.
0: Correct PG wiring
PG Rotating
U4-06 1: The speed command is opposite to the PG feedback -
Direction
direction. Please check the wiring.
U4-08 PID Output 2 Displays PID control output(100% is the max. frequency) 0.01%

<1> The default is determined by the drive capacity, control method and ND/HD mode.

<2> Refer to user manual for details. http://www.liteon-ia.com.tw/ENG/download.php

<3> Double the value for 440V class AC drives.

<4> The parameter can be set during run.

<6> Contact the local distributor for any malfunction.

206
 Chapter 7│Retain

Chapter 8│Troubleshooting

8.1 Alarm and Fault Displays

Table 8.1 Alarm and Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
EF0 Retain
1. Remove the cause of the
external fault then reset the
multi-function input.
1. An external device
2. Confirm if the signal lines is
External Fault tripped an alarm
EF1 to properly connected to the
( Input Terminal S1 to 2. Incorrect wiring
EF terminals assigned for external
S7 ) 3. Multi-function input
fault detection (E1-口口= 23 to
wiring is not correct
38)
3. Confirm if E1-口口=23 to 38 is
set to the unused terminals.
PID Feedback High 1. b5-22 andb5-23
1. Confirm b5-22 and b5-23
inappropriate setting
settings
PID feedback input is 2. PID feedback wiring
2. Correct the wiring
greater than the incorrect
FbH 3. Replace the sensor if it is
detection level set to 3. Feedback sensor
damaged
b5-22 for longer than malfunction
4. Replace the PCB or drive.
the detection time set to 4. Feedback input circuit
Contact the local distributor.
b5-23 malfunction
PID Feedback Low 1. Inappropriate setting in 1. Correct b5-12 and b5-13
b5-12 and b5-13 settings
FbL When the PID feedback 2. Incorrect PID feedback 2. Correct the wiring
detection is enabled in wiring 3. Replace the sensor if it is
b5-11, a FbL will be 3. Feedback sensor damaged
207
Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
triggered while the PID malfunction 4. Contact the local distributor to
feedback falls below the 4. Incorrect feedback input replace the board or the drive.
level set to b5-12 for circuit
longer than the time set
to b5-13.
1.Check the temperature
surrounding the drive
a. Improve the air flow inside the
Heatsink Overheat enclosure panel
1. Ambient temperature is
b. Install an air conditioner or fan
too high
Heatsink temperature to cool the environment
2. Internal cooling fan
oH over 90 to 100°C c. Remove any possible source of
stopped operating
(Overheat level is heat
3. Bad air flow due to
determined by rating of 2. Measure the output current
insufficient room.
the drive) a. Reduce the load
b. Lower setting in C6-00
( Carrier Frequency Option )
3.Replace the cooling fan
1. Correct the wiring for terminal
Motor Overheat MT.
1. Incorrect motor
2. Check the machinery status
temperature input
The temperature signal 3. Check the load, acceleration /
(terminal MT) wiring
from motor temperature deceleration time and cycle time
oH1 2. Fault on the machinery
sensor via the terminal a. Reduce the load.
(e.g., machinery is locked
MT exceeded the b. Increase the C1-00 to C1-07
up)
overheat detection level (Acc./Dec. Time) settings
3. Motor overheat
of the drive. c. Adjust d1-02 to d1-11 (V/F
Characteristics)
Overtorque Detection 1

1. Incorrect parameter
The current has 1. Reset P6-01 and P6-02
settings
ot1 exceeded the torque 2. Check machinery and load
2. Malfunction on
level set to P6-01 for status
machinery
longer than the time set
to P6-02
Overvoltage 1. Drive input power has 1. Install a DC link choke
surge voltage entering Voltage surge can result from a
Voltage in the DC bus 2. Machinery output short thyristor convertor and phase
ov
exceeded the circuit advancing capacitor using the
overvoltage detection 3. Ground fault in the same input power supply
level output circuit causes the 2. Check the motor power cable,
208
Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
1.200 V class: 410 V DC bus capacitor to relay terminals and motor
2.400 V class: 820 V overcharge terminal box
4. Electrical signal 3. Correct grounding shorts and
interference causes drive reapply power
malfunction 4. Check the solutions for
5. PG cable is interference suppression
disconnected »Check the control circuit lines,
6. Incorrect PG cable main circuit lines and grounding
wiring wiring.
7. PG encoder wiring is »If the MC is the source of
interference by electrical interference, connect a
signal suppressor to it.
5. Reconnect the cable
6. Correct the wiring
7. Separate the wiring from the
source of the electrical signal
interference. It is usually the
output lines from the drive
1. Correct the drive input power
wiring
2. Tighten the terminals
1. Input power phase loss 3. Check the voltage
2. Loose wiring terminals a. Adjust the voltage according to
Undervoltage of drive input power the drive input power
3. Problem with the specifications
1.Voltage in the DC bus voltage from the drive b. Check the main circuit
fell below the input power magnetic contactor if there is no
Uv
undervoltage detection 4. The drive main circuit problem with the power supply
level (P2-03) capacitors are weakened. 4&5. Turn on and turn off the
2.200 V class: 190 V 5. The contactor or relay power to see if any problem
3.400 V class: 380 V on the soft-charge bypass occurs
circuit is damaged Replace either the entire drive or
the control board if the problem
continues to occur. Contact the
local distributor for more
information.
Undertorque Detection
1. Incorrect parameter
1 1. Reset P6-01 and P6-02
settings
Ut1 2. Ensure there is no problem on
2.Malfunction on
The current has the machinery side.
machinery side
dropped below the
209
Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
torque detection level
set to P6-01 for longer
than the time set to
P6-02
Mechanical Weakening
Detection for
Undertorque Undertorque in the Check the condition of
UL
conditions set to P6-06 mechanical weakening
Undertorque in the
conditions set to P6-06
Mechanical Weakening
Detection for
Overtorque Overtorque in the Check the condition of
oL
conditions set to P6-06 mechanical weakening
Overtorque in the
conditions set to P6-06
Baseblock
An external baseblock
signal was input via one of Check baseblock signal input
bb Drive output interrupted
the multi-function input timing and external sequence
by an external
terminals (S1 to S7)
baseblock signal
Drive Overheat Warning 1. Search the device which caused
the overheat warning. Remove
Drive Overheat Warning An overheat warning in the cause of the problem.
oH2 input via a the drive was triggered by 2. Reset Drive Overheat Warning
multi-function input an external device input at the assigned
terminal (S1 to S7 ) when multi-function input terminal (S1
E1-口口= 40 to S7)
1. The load is too heavy 1. Reduce the load or use a drive
2. Deceleration and of higher rating
acceleration times are too 2. Calculate the torque required
Current Alarm short during acceleration and the
3.The drive is attempting inertia
Drive current exceeded to run a motor greater »Take the following steps if the
HCA
the level of over current than the maximum torque level is not right for the
warning (150% of the allowable capacity, or a load
rated current) special-purpose motor is · Increase the settings for
being used acceleration and deceleration
4.The current level went up time (C1-00 to C1-07)
because of Speed Search · Use a drive of higher rating

210
Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
while attempting to 3. Check the motor capacity
perform a fault restart or · Make sure the motor capacity is
after a momentary power right for the drive rating.
loss 4. During a momentary power
loss or an attempt to reset a fault,
the alarm is displayed. However,
there is no need to take any
action because the fault display
will disappear shortly

8.2 Fault Detection

Table 8.2 Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solution

Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
Output power cable is Check and replace output power
GF Ground Fault
damaged cable
1. Regenerative energy is 1. Increase the deceleration time
flowing from the motor into settings (C1-01, C1-03, C1-05,
the drive because the C1-07)
deceleration time is too »Install a braking unit or a
short dynamic braking resistor
2. The motor overshoot the »Set P3-03 (Stall Prevention during
Overvoltage speed reference because Deceleration) to 1
(Acceleration, the acceleration time is too (Enabled)(default is 1)
Deceleration and short 2. Confirm if overvoltage alarm
Constant Speed) 3. Excessive braking load oVA or oVC was triggered during
oVA, 4. Surge voltage entering sudden drive acceleration.
oVd, The main circuit DC from the drive input power »Increase the acceleration time
oVC voltage exceeded the 5. Motor short-circuited »Use S-curve deceleration and
overvoltage detection Ground fault current acceleration times and increase
level charges the drive main the value set to C2-01 ( S-curve
200V class: 410V circuit capacitor. at acceleration end )
400 V class: 820 V 6. Improper parameter 3. Install a braking unit or a
settings for Speed Search braking resistor
(including Speed Search 4. Install a DC reactor
after a fault restart and after »Thyristor convertor and phase
a momentary power loss) advancing capacitor using the
7. Drive input voltage is too same input power supply might
high cause a voltage surge

211
Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
8. The braking transistor or
5. Check the motor power cable,
braking resistor are wired relay terminals and motor
incorrectly terminal box
9. PG cable is disconnected» Correct grounding shorts and
10. PG cable wiring is reapply power
incorrect 6. Adjust parameter settings for
11. PG encoder wiring has Speed Search (group b3)
interference of electrical »Proceed Auto-Tuning for
signal line-to-line resistance
12. Electrical signal 7. Check the voltage
interference causes the »Lower drive input power
drive malfunction voltage within the range listed in
13. Incorrect inertia setting
the drive specifications
of the load 8. Check the wiring of the
14.Motor hunting occurs braking resistor and braking unit
»Correct the wiring
9. Tighten the terminal or replace
the damaged cable
10. Correct the wiring
11. Separate the PG wiring from
the source of the electrical signal
interference (drive output cable)
12. Check the solutions for
interference suppression
»Check the wiring of control
circuit l, main circuit and
grounding.
13.Check the load inertia settings
when using KEB, or Stall
Prevention during deceleration
14. Adjust the parameters to
suppress hunting
»Adjust n1-01 (Hunting
Prevention Gain)
1. The motor insulation is 1. Check the insulation resistance
damaged or the motor is 2. Check the motor power cable
Overcurrent 3. Check the resistance between
oCA, overheated
(Acceleration, the cable and the terminal.
oCd, 2. Grounding problem
Deceleration and 4. Short circuit on drive output
oCC caused by damaged motor side or grounding causes
Constant Speed)
cable register damage.
3.The drive is damaged 5. Measure the current flowing
212
Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
4.The load is too heavy into the motor
5. Settings for acceleration
5. Check the motor capacity
or deceleration time is too
6. Calculate the torque required
short
during acceleration according to
6.The drive is running a the load inertia and acceleration
special purpose motor or a time. If the required torque is
motor larger than the drive insufficient, check the motor
rated capacity capacity.
7. A magnetic contactor 7. Install a sequence controller to
ensure the MC does not open or
(MC) on the output side of
close when the drive is
the drive has turned on or
outputting voltage.
off 8. Check the ratios between the
8. V/F set incorrectly frequency and voltage set by
9. Excessive torque V/F.
compensation 9. Adjust d1-02 to d1-11 (or
10. Electrical signal d1-13 to d1-22 for motor 2)
interference causes drive 10.Check the amount of torque
compensation
malfunction
11. Find out possible solutions to
11. Overexcitation gain is suppress the electrical signal
set too high interference
12. Run command was 11. Check if the fault occurs
applied while motor was frequently with overexcitation
coasting function operation
13. Incorrect motor code 12. Enable Speed Search via
multi-function input terminal
14. The motor does not
14. Check the control method
match the drive control (A1-02)
method 15. Use a larger drive
15. The motor cable is too
long
1. Motor has been
damaged due to the motor 1. Replace the motor or check
IGBT Fault or Output
insulation weakened or the motor insulation resistance
Short Circuit
SC overheat 2. Repair any short circuits and
2. The cable is damaged check the motor power cable
3. Hardware fault
4. The drive is damaged
EF0 Retain
External Fault 1. An external device 1. Remove the cause of the
EF1to
（Input Terminal S1 to tripped an alarm external fault then reset the
EF7
S7） 2. Incorrect wiring multi-function input.

213
Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
3. Multi-function input 2. Confirm if the signal lines is
wiring is not correct properly connected to the
terminals assigned for external
fault detection (E1-口口= 23 to
38)
3. Confirm if E1-口口=23 to 38 is
set to the unused terminals.
1. Check the temperature
surrounding the drive
a. Improve the air flow inside the
Heatsink Overheat enclosure panel
1. Ambient temperature is
b. Install an air conditioner or fan
too high
Heatsink temperature to cool the environment
2. Internal cooling fan
oH over 90 to 100°C c. Remove any possible source of
stopped operating
(Overheat level is heat
3. Bad air flow due to
determined by rating of 2. Measure the output current
insufficient room.
the drive) a. Reduce the load
b. Lower setting in C6-00
( Carrier Frequency Option )
3.Replace the cooling fan
1. Correct the wiring for terminal
Motor Overheat
MT.
1. Incorrect motor
2. Check the machinery status
The temperature signal temperature input (terminal
3. Check the load, acceleration /
from motor MT) wiring
deceleration time and cycle time
oH1 temperature sensor via 2. Fault on the machinery
a. Reduce the load.
the terminal MT (e.g., machinery is locked
b. Increase C1-00 to C1-07
exceeded the overheat up)
(Acc./Dec. Time) settings
detection level of the 3. Motor overheat
c. Adjust d1-02 to d1-11 (V/F
drive.
Characteristics)
Mechanical Weakening
Detection for
Overtorque Overtorque in the Check the condition of
oL
conditions set to P6-06 mechanical weakening
Overtorque in the
conditions set to P6-06
1. The load is too heavy 1. Check loading capacity
2. The acceleration and » Reduce the load
oL1 Motor Overload deceleration times are too 2. Confirm acceleration and
short deceleration times
3. The motor is driven »Increase C1-00 to C1-07
214
Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
below the rated speed with parameter settings
a high load 3. »Reduce the load
4. Incorrect setting in P1-00 » Increase the speed
(Motor Protection Function » Either increase the motor
Selection) when running a capacity or use a special-purpose
special motor motor if the motor needs to
5. The voltage determined operate at low speeds
by the V/F is too high 4. Set P1-00 to 2.
6. d2-00 (Motor Rated 5. Adjust d1-02 to d1-11 settings
Current ) setting incorrect (V/F Characteristics)
7. The base frequency is set Note: If d1-02 to d1-11 settings
too low are too low, load tolerance at low
8. Use one drive to run speeds will be reduced
multiple motors 6.Confirm the motor rated
9. The electrical thermal current
protection characteristics » Set d2-00 (Motor Rated
do not match the motor Current ) according to the motor
overload characteristics. nameplate
10. The electrical thermal 7. Confirm the rated frequency
relay operates at the wrong showed on the motor nameplate
level »Set d1-04 (Base Frequency)
11. Motor overheated by according to the motor
overexcitation operations nameplate
12. Speed Search related 8. Set P1-00 (Motor Protection
parameters are set Function Selection) to 0
incorrectly (Disabled) and install a thermal
13. Power supply phase loss relay to each motor
causes output current 9. Confirm characteristics of the
oscillation. motor
»Set P1-00 (Motor Protection
Function Selection) correctly
»Install an external thermal relay
10. Overexcitation increases the
motor loss
11. Adjust parameters related to
Speed Search
»Adjust the b3-01 (Speed Search
Operation Current ) setting
12. Check the power supply for
phase loss

215
Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
1. Check loading capacity
» Reduce the load
2. Confirm acceleration and
deceleration times
»Increase C1-00 to C1-07
1. The load is too heavy
parameter settings
2. The acceleration and
3. Adjust d1-02 to d1-11 settings
deceleration times are too
(V/F Characteristics)
short
Note: If d1-02 to d1-11 settings
3. The voltage determined
are too low, load tolerance at low
by the V/F is too high
speeds will be reduced
4. The drive capacity is too
4. Use a larger drive
small
5. »Reduce the load at low speed
5. The motor is driven
» Use a larger drive
oL2 Drive Overload below the rated speed with
» Set a lower value to C6-00
a high load
(Carrier Frequency)
6. Torque compensation is
6. Check the torque
too high
compensation
7. Speed Search related
» Set a lower value to C3-00
parameters are set
(Torque Compensation Gain)
incorrectly
until the current is decreased
8. Power supply phase loss
and the motor does not stall.
causes output current
7. Adjust parameters related to
oscillation
Speed Search
» Adjust b3-01 (Speed Search
Operation Current)
8. Check the power supply for
phase loss
Overtorque Detection 1

1. Incorrect parameter
The current has 1. Reset P6-01 and P6-02
settings
ot1 exceeded the torque 2. Check machinery and load
2. Malfunction on the
level set to P6-01 for status
machinery side
longer than the time set
to P6-02
Undertorque Detection
1 1. Incorrect parameter
1. Reset P6-01 and P6-02
settings
Ut1 2. Ensure there is no problem on
The current has 2.Malfunction on the
the machinery side.
dropped below the machinery side
torque detection level
216
Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
set to P6-01 for longer
than the time set to
P6-02
Mechanical Weakening
Detection for
Undertorque Undertorque in the Check the condition of
UL
conditions set to P6-06 mechanical weakening
Undertorque in the
conditions set to P6-06
1. Correct the drive input power
wiring
2. Tighten the terminals
3. Check the voltage
1. Input power phase loss
Undervoltage Detection a. Adjust the voltage according
2. Loose wiring terminals of
1 to the drive input power
drive input power
specifications
3. Problem with the voltage
Voltage in the DC bus b. Check the main circuit
from the drive input power
Uv1 fell below the magnetic contactor if there is no
4. The drive main circuit
undervoltage detection problem with the power supply
capacitors are weakened.
level (P2-03) during run. 4. Turn on and turn off the power
5. The contactor or relay on
· 200 V class: 190 V to see if any problem occurs
the soft-charge bypass
· 400 V class: 380 V a. Replace either the entire drive
circuit is damaged
or the control board if the
problem continues to occur.
Contact the local distributor for
more information.
Uv2 Retain
1. Check wiring for errors in the
main circuit drive input power
Input Phase Loss 1. Phase loss in the drive »Correct wiring
input power 2. Make sure the terminals are
Drive input power has a 2. Drive input power tightened correctly
large imbalance of terminals has a loose wiring »Apply the tightening torque as
PF voltage between 3. Drive input power showed in the manual
phases or has an open voltage has an excessive 3. Confirm the voltage from the
phase fluctuation drive input power
(Detected when 4. The main circuit »Apply possible solutions for
P7-00=1) capacitors are impaired drive input power stabilization
4. Check drive input power. If
drive input power seems normal

217
Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
but the alarm continues to occur,
replace either the entire drive or
the control board. Contact the
local distributor for more
information.

1.Check the errors for wiring

1. The output cable is not then properly connect the
connected output cable
2. The motor winding is »Correct the wiring
impaired 2.Check the resistance which
3. The output terminal is located between motor lines
Output Phase Loss
loose »If the winding is impaired,
LF1 4. The rated current of the replace the motor
Phase loss on the drive
motor being used is 5% less 3.Use tightening torque which
output side
than the drive rated current showed in the manual in order to
5. An output transistor is fasten the terminal
impaired 4.Check motor capacities and the
6. A single phase motor is drive
activating 5.The drive cannot run a single
phase motor
LF2 Retain
1. Incorrect parameter
settings
1. Reset b5-22 and b5-23
2. Incorrect PID feedback
FbH PID Feedback High 2. Correct the wiring
wiring
3. Check the sensor
3. Feedback sensor
malfunction
1. Incorrect parameter
settings
1. Reset b5-12 and b5-13
2. Incorrect PID feedback
FbL PID Feedback Low 2. Correct the wiring
wiring
3. Check the sensor
3. Feedback sensor
malfunction
bUS Retain
1. Correct the wiring
1. Incorrect wiring
Modbus »Check short circuits and
CE 2. Communication data
Communication Error disconnected cables, repair if
error caused by noise
necessary
218
Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
2. Check possible solution to
suppress the noise
CF Retain

Err Retain

Sto Retain
A FJOG and RJOG Run
FJOG/ RJOG Input Check the Run command from
JoGEr commands are received at
Error the external source for Fjog/Rjog
the same time

8.3 Operation Errors

Table 8.3 Error Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Keypad
Error Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
1. Set the parameters to the
Parameter Range Parameters are set outside of
oPE02 proper values
Setting Error the possible setting range
2. Reset the drive
1. Either of Up command and
Down command is not set
Multi-Function Properly assign both of the UP and
(E1-□□= 10 or 11 )
oPE03 Input Selection Down commands to the
2. Either of Up command 2
Error multi-function input terminal.
and Down command 2 is not
set (E1-□□=12 or 13)
Multi-Function input
3-Wire Sequence Do not assign multi-function input
terminals S1 and S2 are
oPE04 Control Setting terminals S1 and S2 to E1-□□= 2
assigned to E1-□□= 2 (3-Wire
Error (3-Wire Sequence)
Sequence)
Communication
oPE05
Error
A control method that
requires a PG option card
Control Method Install a PG option card or correct
oPE06 (A1-02 = 1, 3, or 5) is
Selection Error the value set to A1-02
selected, but no PG card is
installed
Multi-Function E3-01 and E3-07 are set to Set different values to E3-01 and
oPE07
Analog Input the same value E3-07

219
Keypad
Error Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
Selection Error
1. Contradictory settings
· b5-14 (PID Sleep Start Level)
is not set to 0.0
· b1-02 (Stopping Method
Selection) is set to 2 (DC
Braking to Stop) or 3 (Coast
PID Control to Stop with Timer)
1. Correct the parameter setting.
Selection Fault 2. L2-01 (Frequency
2. Correct the parameter setting.
oPE09 (When b5-00 (PID Command Lower Limit)≠0
3. Correct the parameter setting.
Control Setting)= 1 when b5-00 = 1 or 2 (PID
4. Correct the parameter setting.
to 4) Control Enabled)
3. b5-10 (PID Output Reverse
Selection) = 1 (Reverse
Enabled) when b5-00 = 1 or
2
4. L2-01 ≠ 0 when b5-00 = 3
or 4
V/F Data Setting
Error

Incorrect d1-02, Correct the setting in d1-02, d1-04,

V/F parameters setting
oPE10 d1-04, d1-06, d1-06, d1-08 and d1-10 (or d1-13,
incorrect
d1-08, d1-10 (or d1-15, d1-17, d1-19 and d1-21).
d1-13, d1-15,
d1-17, d1-19,
d1-21) settings
1. Contradictory settings
· C6-03 (Carrier Frequency
Proportional Gain)＞6
· C6-02 (Minimum Carrier
Frequency)＞ C6-01
Carrier Frequency
oPE11 (Maximum Carrier Correct the parameter setting.
Setting Error
Frequency)
Note: If C6-03 ≤ 6 , the drive
operates at C6-01
2. The limit set in C6-00 to
C6-03 are contradictory
When E1-□□=61, there is
Analog Frequency
oPE12 another E1-□□ is set to 10 to Correct the setting.
Command Hold Error
13, 18 or 53 to 55.
220
Keypad
Error Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
main and
When b1-00 and b1-07 are
Alternative
oPE13 setting the same supply Correct the setting.
Frequency
source
Command Error
Incorrect Jump The setting does not follow
oPE14 Correct the setting.
Frequency Setting L3-00 ≤L3-01 ≤L3-02

221
8.4 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection

Table 8.4 Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solution

Keypad
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
User presses STOP key Do not press STOP key during
TnF00 Auto-Tuning Stop
during Auto-Tuning Auto-Tuning
The line-to-line resistance in
Line-to Line Auto-Tuning is negative or
TnF01 Check and correct motor wiring
Resistance Error limited by the upper the
lower limit
Make sure the data entered in t1-03
The voltage or current is too to t1-05 is the same as the
Stationary
TnF02 large during stationary information showed on the motor
Auto-Tuning Error
Auto-Tuning nameplate
Check and correct motor wiring
Make sure the data entered in t1-03
to t1-05 is the same as the
information showed on the motor
The voltage or current is too
Rotational nameplate
TnF03 large during rotational
Auto-Tuning Error Check and correct motor wiring
Auto-Tuning
Perform Auto-Tuning after
disconnect the motor from the
machinery
Make sure the data entered to t1-05
and t1-07 is the same as the
t5-05 and t1-07 setting
TnF07 Motor Data Error information showed on the motor
incorrect
nameplate.
Reset the parameters.

222
 Chapter 9│Inspection & Maintenance

9.1 Safety

Electrical Shock
 Allow only qualified electrical engineers to install the drive. Failure to comply could cause electrical
shocks to personnel or damage to the drive.
 Ensure the power supply is off when connecting. Failure to comply could cause electrical shocks.
 Shut off the power supply of all the equipment before inspection. Maintain the drive only when the
CHARGE indicator light is off or 5 minutes after turning off power supply, so as to avoid charged
capacitors causing physical injury.
 Do not perform wiring, remove option card or replace cooling fan during drive operation to
prevent an electrial shock.
 Shut off the drive power supply and ensure no voltage is left before maintenance.
 Do not operate the drive with the drive enclosure removed. Failure to comply could cause electrical
shocks.
 Properly wire the ground terminal of the motor side. Failure to comply could cause electrical
shocks when touching the motor enclosure.
 Do not touch any live components to avoid electrical shocks.
 Do not tough the terminals. Avoid output cables contacting the drive enclosure.
 Do not inspect or maintain the drive when waring loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection.
Failure to comply could cause electrical shocks or inquiry.

AC drives consist of electronics such as IC, resistors, capacitors, transistors fans and relays. As
electronics components have limited life, characteristic changes or malfunction will occur after
years of use under normal conditions. Regular inspections, components replacement are
therefore necessary. Perform the regular inspection according to the check list in this chapter.

 More frequent inspection is needed in the following situations.

· Poor storage conditions.
· High ambient temperature
· Frequent starts and stops
· Excessive vibration or shock load
· Fluctuations in the AC power supply or load
· Dust, metal shavings, salt, sulfuric acid and chlorine atmospheres

Perform the first inspection one to two years after installation.

223
9.2 Periodic Inspection
Perform regular inspections according to the following check lists to ensure the optimum
product performance and status.

9.2.1 Environment
Inspection Cycle
Inspection Points Corrective Action 6 12
Daily
months months
Ambient temperature, humidity,
Eliminate the source of contaminants or
vibration, dusk, harmful gases, oil mist, ○
correct poor environment.
water.
Any foreign material or tool left
Eliminate foreign material or tool. ○
around？

9.2.2 Voltage
Inspection Cycle
Inspection Points Corrective Action 6 12
Daily
months months
 Correct the voltage or power supply to
Is the DC bus and control circuit voltge
within nameplate specifications. ○
normal？
 Verify all main circuit phases.

9.2.3 Keypad Monitor

Inspection Cycle
Inspection Points Corrective Action 6 12
Daily
months months
Is the display clear to see？ Clean the keypad monitor. ○
Any character missing? Contact the local Lite-On distributor. ○

9.2.4 Enclosure
Inspection Cycle
Inspection Points Corrective Action 6 12
Daily
months months
Replace the damaged screws or
Are the screws all tightened？ ○
terminals if tightening is not possible.
 Replace the damaged components
Is the shape changed？ ○
 Replace the entire drive if necessary.

224
  Replace the damaged components
Is the color changed by the heat？ ○
 Replace the entire drive if necessary.
 Affix the terminal block cover
 Remove the dust with a vacuum
Any dust collection or stain? cleaner ○
 Replace components if cleaning is not
possible.

9.2.5 Main Circuit

Inspection Cycle
Inspection Points Corrective Action 6 12
Daily
months months
Replace the damaged screws or
Are the screws all tightened？ ○
terminals if tightening is not possible.
Any shape change, crack, damage or
Replace the entire drive if the board is
color change at the components or ○
impossible to be repared or replaced.
insulators because of heat？
Any dust collection or stain? Remove the foreign material and dust. ○

9.2.6 Main Circuit- Terminals & Cables

Inspection Cycle
Inspection Points Corrective Action 6 12
Daily
months months
Any shape or color change at the
Repair or replace damaged wire ○
terminals or jumper because of heat？
Any damage or color change at the
Repair or replace the damaged cables. ○
cables？

9.2.7 Main Circuit- Capacitors

Inspection Cycle
Inspection Points Corrective Action 6 12
Daily
months months
Any liquid leakage, color change, crack
Replace the entire drive if the ○
or swell?
component is impossible to be
Has the cap come off or swellen? ○
replaced.
Measure the Capacitance if necessary ○

225
9.2.8 Main Circuit- Resistors
Inspection Cycle
Inspection Points Corrective Action 6 12
Daily
months months
Any odor or crack because of heat?  It is normal if the color changes ○
Any disconnection? slightly. ○
 Check the connection if the color
Any damage at the connection? ○
changes.

9.2.9 Main Circuit- Magnetic Contactors & Relays

Inspection Cycle
Inspection Points Corrective Action 6 12
Daily
months months
Any noise during operation?  Check the circuit voltage respectively ○
when the voltage exceeds or is within
the tolerance.
Any damage at the connection? ○
 Replace the damaged MC, relay or
board.

9.2.10 Control Circuit- Control Boards & Connectors

Inspection Cycle
Inspection Points Corrective Action 6 12
Daily
months months
Are the screws and connectors all  Fix the loose connections.
○
tightened？  Replace the board if an antistatic cloth
Any odor or color change because of or vacuum plunger cannot be used.
○
heat?  Do not use any solvents to clean the
Any crack, damage, shape change or board.
○
rust?  Remove the dust with a vacuum
cleaner.
Any liquid leakage or swell at the  Replace the entire drive if the
○
capacitor? component is impossible to be
clearned or replaced.

9.2.11 Cooling- Fans

Inspection Points Corrective Action Inspection Cycle

226
 6 12
Daily
months months
Any abnormal noise or vibration? ○
Are the screws all tightened？ Clean or replace the cooling fan. ○
Any color change because of heat? ○

9.2.12 Cooling- Air Duct

Inspection Cycle
Inspection Points Corrective Action 6 12
Daily
months months
Any obstruction at the heatsink , air
Clean the obstruction and dust. ○
intake and exhaust openings?

9.3 Drive Cooling Fans

NOTICE: The cooling fan cannot operate properly when installed incorrectly and could damage
the drive. Contact the local Lite-On distributor to order replacement collng fans when required.
For drives with multiple cooling fans, replace all the cooling fans when performing
maintenance to ensure maximum product performance life.

9.3.1 Cooling Fan Replacement

CAUTION
 Allow only qualified electrical engineers to install the drive. Failure to comply could cause electrical
shocks to personnel or damage to the drive.
 Ensure the power supply is off when connecting. Failure to comply could cause electrical shocks.
 Shut off the power supply of all the equipment before inspection. Maintain the drive only when the
CHARGE indicator light is off or 5 minutes after turning off power supply, so as to avoid charged
capacitors causing physical injury.
 Do not perform wiring, remove option card or replace cooling fan during drive operation to
prevent an electrial shock.
 Shut off the drive power supply and ensure no voltage is left before maintenance.
 Do not operate the drive with the drive enclosure removed. Failure to comply could cause electrical
shocks.
 Properly wire the ground terminal of the motor side. Failure to comply could cause electrical
shocks when touching the motor enclosure.
 Do not touch any live components to avoid electrical shocks.
 Do not tough the terminals. Avoid output cables contacting the drive enclosure.

227
 Do not inspect or maintain the drive when waring loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection.
Failure to comply could cause electrical shocks or inquiry.
 Do not touch the drive heatsink which could be very hot during operation.
 Do not replace the cooling fan until 15 minutes after shutting off the drive power and
making sure the heatsink is cooled down.
 The cooling fan cannot operate properly when installed incorrectly and could damage the
drive. Follow the instructions when replacing cooling fans. For drives with multiple cooling
fans, replace all the cooling fans when performing maintenance to ensure maximum
product performance life.

228
 Chapter 10│Drive Derating
By derating the drive capacity, the drive can run at above the rated temperature, altitude and
default carrier frequency. For example, a drive with 20 A rated current can be derated to 16A
current so as to run with higher temperature tolerance.
Change the carrier frequency to derate the drive, please refer to the following figure.

Normal Duty
rating
Heavy Duty
rating
380V 1 to 3HP

60% of Heavy
Duty

2kH 8kH 16kHz

z z
Note: The lower the rating EVO8000 series 3.7kW ~ 5.5kW inverter overloaded 50%, and the remaining
models are all 60%

10.1 Temperature Derating

When the ambient temperature exceeds the tolerance specified in the product specifications,
the drive output current must be derated to ensure the performance life. Meanwhile, set P7-12
(Installation Method Selection) according to the installation conditions so as to ensure reliable
drive overload protection.

229
 Drive rated current P7-14=0 IP00
(%)
100 P7-14=2 NEMA 1

85

70

P7-14=1 Side-by-side
55 mounting

P7-05
-10 30 40 50 (Ambient Temperature
Setting: ℃)

10.2 Altitude Derating

 The most appropriate altitude to install the drive is below 1000m.
 The drive rated voltage and the rated output current must be derated for 1% per 100 m
for drive installations from 1000 m to 3000 m altitude.
 The drive cannot be installed above 3000 m altitude.

230
 Chapter 11│Communications

11.1 Modbus Communication Specifications

Item Specifications
Interface RS-485
Communications Cycle Asynchronous
Communication Parameters Communication speeds
Data length
Select even, odd or none
Stop bit
Protocol Modbus
Max number of Slaves 31 AC drives

11.2 Connecting to Controller/PLC/HMI

11.2.1 Communication Cable Connection

1. Connect the communications cable to the drive and the controller/PLC/HMI when the power
is cut off. Use the drive terminal RJ45 for Modbus communication.

8 1 Modbus RS-485
Pin 1~2, 7, 8: 保留
Pin 3, 6:SGND
Pin 4:SG-
RS-485 Pin 5:SG+

Note: To prevent the interference, separate the communications cables from the main circuit
cables, power cable and other wiring. Always use shielded cables for the communications
cables, and shielded clamps.
2. Ensure the termination resistor is installed in the last drive of the slave series.
3. Turn the power on.
4. Set the parameters needed for the communication(E6 - 00 to E6 - 12) using the keypad.
5. Shut the power off and wait until the display goes out.
6. Turn the power on.
7. The communication between the drive and the controller/PLC/HMI is now ready.

231
11.2.2 Termination Resistor Setting for Multiple Connections
The default of termination resistor for RS-485 communication is OFF. Switch this DIP switch to
ON when the drive is the last in a series of slave drives. In addition, make sure this DIP switch
RS-485 in all other slaves is placed to OFF.

OFF ON
ON

11.2.3 Termination Resistor Function

· Interference signal suppression
· Wiring impedance balance

11.2.4 When to Install Termination Resistor

Install the termination resistor in the drive on the end of the network and the master device to
suppress the interference signal in the following situations. (Note: The installation must be on
the both ends)
1. Multiple devices are connected by the network.
2. The communication cable is too long.
3. Multiple devices are connected via long communication cables.

11.3 Modbus Setup Parameters

This section explains the parameters needed for Modbus communication.

E6- 06 Drive Station Address

Sets the drive station address.

232
Note: Cycle the drive power to activate the setting..
Drive Station Default: 1
E6-06 Sets the drive station address.
Address Range: 1 to 31
Note: When set to 0, the drive will not respond to the Modbus communication.

E6- 07 Communication Speed Selection

Selects the speed for the Modbus communication.
Note: Cycle the drive power to activate the setting..
Sets the baud rate for terminals SG(+) and SG(-) of
RS-485 communication.
0: 1200 bps (bit/sec)
1: 2400 bps
RS-485
2: 4800 bps
Communication Default: 3
E6-07 3: 9600 bps
Baud Rate Range: 0 to 8
4: 19200 bps
Setting
5: 38400 bps
6 : 57600 bps
7 : 76800 bps
8 : 115200 bps

E6- 08 RS-485 Communication Parity Selection

Sets the Modbus communication type.
Selects the communication parity for terminals SG(+)
and SG(-) of RS-485 communication.
0: 8, N, 2 (Modbus RTU)
1: 8, N, 1 (Modbus RTU)
2: 8, E, 1 (Modbus RTU)
3: 8, O, 1 (Modbus RTU)
RS-485
4: 8, N, 2 (Modbus ASCII) Default: 1
E6-08 Communication
5: 8, N, 1 (Modbus ASCII) Range: 0 to 11
Parity Selection
6: 8, E, 1 (Modbus ASCII)
7: 8, O, 1 (Modbus ASCII)
8: 7, N, 2 (Modbus ASCII)
9: 7, N, 1 (Modbus ASCII)
10: 7, E, 1 (Modbus ASCII)
11: 7, O, 1 (Modbus ASCII)

E6- 09 Communication Error Detection Time

Determines the detection time to trigger the communication error.
Communication Determines the detection time to trigger the Default: 0.0 s
E6-09
Error Detection communication error. (This function is disabled when Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s
233
 Time set to 0)
If the drive does not receive any response via pulse train communication within the time set in
E6-09, the fault will be triggered to perform the action set in E6-00

E6- 10 Transmit Wait Time

Sets the wait time between sending and receiving data.
Transmit Sets the wait time between sending and receiving Default: 5ms
E6-10
Wait Time data. Range: 5 to 65 ms
PLC/Controller Drive Drive PLC/Controller PLC/Controller Drive

Command Data Response Message Command Data

24 bits E6-10 24 bits 5ms Min.

11.4 Drive Operations by Modbus

The drive operations by Modbus communication are determined by the drive parameter
settings. This section explains the provided functions and the related parameters.

11.4.1 Actions by Modbus

The following actions can be performed by a PLC regardless of the parameter settings except
for E6 parameters.
· Monitor drive operation from a PLC.
· View and change parameter settings.
· Reset faults.
· Assign fulti-function inputs.

11.4.2 Drive Control by Modbus

Select Modbus communication according to the following table to run/stop the motor and
give frequency commands.
0∶ Keypad
Frequency 1∶ Control Circuit Terminal (Analog Input) Default∶ 1
b1-00 Command 2∶ Terminal Up/Down Min.: 0
Selection 1 3∶ Modbus Communication Max.: 4
4∶ Pulse Train Input (Including PWM signal input)
Run 0∶ Keypad
Default∶ 1
b1-01 Command 1∶ Control Circuit Terminal (Sequence Control Input)
Range: 0, 1, 2
Selection 1 2∶ Modbus Communication
b1-07 Frequency Enabled while E1-00 to E1-07 is set to 4 and the DIP Default∶ 0

234
 Command switch is set to OFF Min.: 0
Selection 2 0∶ Keypad Max.: 4
1∶ Control Circuit Terminal (Analog Input)
2∶ Terminal Up/Down
3∶ Modbus Communication
4∶ Pulse Train Input (Including PWM signal input)
Enabled while E1-00 to E1-07 is set to 4 and the DIP
Run switch is set to OFF
Default∶ 0
b1-08 Command 0∶ Keypad
Range: 0, 1, 2
Selection 2 1∶ Control Circuit Terminal (Sequence Control Input)
2∶ Modbus Communication

11.5 Message Format

11.5.1 Message Content

In Modbus communications, the master gives commands to the slave, and the slave responds.
The following table shows the configured message for both sending and receiving, and the
length of data packets is determined by the command (function) content.

11.5.2 Message Configuration

ASCII scheme:
STX Start = ‘: ’ (3AH)
Address Hi Station address:
Address Lo 8-bit, consists of two ASCll codes
Function Hi Function code:
Function Lo 8-bit, consists of two ASCll codes
DATA (n-1) Data Characters:
……. n×8-bit, consists of two ASCll codes
DATA 0 n<=16, max. 32 ASCII codes (20 pieces of data)
LRC CHK Hi LRC check code:
LRC CHK Lo 8-bit, consists of two ASCll codes
END Hi End:
END Lo END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)
RTU scheme:
START Duration of input singal time is greater than equal 10ms
Address Station address: 8-bit binary
Function Function code: 8-bit binary
DATA (n-1) Data Characters:
……. n×8-bit data, n<=16
235
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low CRC checksum:
CRC CHK High 16-bit, consists of 2 sets of 8-bit binary
END Duration of input singal time is greater than equal 10ms

11.5.3 Slave Station Address

Use code between 0 and FF (hex) to set the slave station address. If a message with slave
station address 0 is sent (broadcast), the command from the master will be sent to all slaves.
The slave do not responds to a broadcast message.
00H: To all drive (broadcast)
01H: To drive address 01
0FH: To drive address 15
10H: To drive address 16, so on and so forth up to 31( 1FH).

11.5.4 Function Code

There are four types of function codes:
03H : Read Modbus registers
06H : Write a word to registers(Write to registers)
08H : Loopback test
10H : Write to multiple registers

11.5.5 Data
By combining the Modbus register address (test code in case of a loopback test) and the
register data, the drive configures consecutive data. The length of the data depends on the
command details.

The Modbus register always consists of a data length of two bytes. Data written into the
register must also consist of a length of two bytes. Register data read out from the drive will
always have two bytes.

11.5.6 Error Check

The drive check data validity using CRC scheme.

11.5.7 Command Data

When the drive receives data, it checks for errors. To do so, the drive calculates the CRC and
compares it to the CRC-16 value received in the message. The command will not be processed
if these two values do not match.
Use the default value of FFFFH (i.e., all 16 bits equal 1) to caculate CRC-16 in Modbus. Calculate
the CRC-16 checksum using the following steps:
236
 (1). The starting value of a 16-bit register value is FFFFH (all 16 bits equal 1).
(2). Perform an exclusive OR of this value and the slave address. Then save the result in
the register.
(3). Right shift the result, put 0 to the left of the high-order byte and check the CRC
register value.
(4). If the value is 0, save the result from step (3) above in the CRC register.
If the value is not 0, perform an exclusive OR of the result from stop (3) and the value
A001h(1010 0000 0000 0001). Then save the result in the CRC register.
(5). Repeat step (3) and (4) until 8-bit operations are all performed.
(6). Repeat step (2) to (5). 8-bit command data until all the command data are caculated.
The result of the last shift is the CRC checksum. Send the low-order byte before the
high-order byte when sending the CRC checksum. For an example of CRC checksum
1241hex, the high-order byte of CRC-16 must be set to 41hex, and the low-order
byte must be set to 12hex.

 CRC Calculation:
UWORD ch_sum ( UBYTE long , UBYTE *rxdbuff ) {
BYTE i = 0;
UWORD wkg = 0xFFFF;
while ( long-- ) {
wkg ^= rxdbuff++;
for ( i = 0 ; i < 8; i++ ) {
if ( wkg & 0x0001 ) {
wkg = ( wkg >> 1 ) ^ 0xa001;
}
else {
wkg = wkg >> 1;
}
}
}
return( wkg );
}

11.5.8 Response Message

Perform a CRC calculation on the response message according to the above description. The
result of the calculation should match the CRC checksum of the response message.

237
11.6 Example of Reading / Responding Data
The following are examples of command and response data.
Example: For the drive address 01H, To read 2 consecutive register data for the drive address
01H, the message is “starting address 2422H.

ASCII Scheme:

Command Message: Respond Message:

STX ‘: ’ STX ‘: ’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘3’ ‘3’
‘2’ Number of data ‘0’
‘4’ (count by byte) ‘4’
Starting address
‘2’ ‘1’
‘2’ ‘7’
Content of address 2422H
‘0’ ‘7’
Number of data ‘0’ ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ ‘0’
Content of address 2423H
‘B’ ‘0’
LRC Check
‘4’ ‘0’
CR ‘7’
END LRC Check
LF ‘1’
CR
END
LF

RTU Scheme:

Command Message: Respond Message:

Address 01H Address 01H
Function 03H Function 03H
Starting data address 24H Number of data 04H
238
 22H (count by byte)
Number of data 00H Content of data 17H
(count by world) 02H address 2422H 70H
CRC CHK Low 6EH Content of data 00H
CRC CHK High F1H address 2423H 00H
CRC CHK Low FEH
CRC CHK High 5CH
Function code 06H: Write one piece of data to register
Example: For the drive address 01H, 1(01H) will written to the drive internal parameter 0100H
(b1-00).

ASCII Scheme:

Command Message: Respond Message:

STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘6’ ‘6’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
Data address Data address
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Data content Data content
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘F’ ‘F’
LRC Check LRC Check
‘7’ ‘6’
CR CR
END END
LF LF

RTU Scheme:
239
 Command Message: Respond Message:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 06H Function 06H
01H 01H
Data address Data address
00H 00H
00H 00H
Data content Data content
01H 01H
CRC CHK High 49H CRC CHK High 49H
CRC CHK Low F6H CRC CHK Low F6H
Command code: 10H, write consecutive data to register (Max. 20 pieces of consecutive data).
For example, changing the drive (address 01H) multi-step speed setting L1-00=60.00 (0880H),
L1-01=50.00 (8801H).

ASCII Scheme

Command Message: Respond Message:

STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’
ADR 1 ‘0’ ADR 1 ‘0’
ADR 0 ‘1’ ADR 0 ‘1’
CMD 1 ‘1’ CMD 1 ‘1’
CMD 0 ‘0’ CMD 0 ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Data ‘8’ ‘8’
Data Address
Starting Address ‘8’ ‘8’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Data Quantity ‘0’ Data Quantity ‘0’
(Word) ‘0’ (Word) ‘0’
‘2’ ‘2’
Data Quantity ‘0’ ‘6’
LRC Check
(Byte) ‘4’ ‘5’
‘0’ CR
END
‘2’ LF
First Storage Register
‘5’
‘8’
‘0’
Next Storage Register
‘1’
240
 ‘F’
‘4’
‘1’
LRC Check
‘2’
CR
END
LF

RTU Scheme:

Command Message: Respond Message:

ADR 01H ADR 01H
CMD 10H CMD 10H
Starting Address 08H Starting Address 08H
(Word) 80H (Word) 80H

Data Quantity 00H Register Written Quantity 00H

(Word) 02H (Word) 02H

Data Quantity (Byte) 04H

First 00H CRC Check High 42H
Storage Register 3CH CRC Check Low 40H
Second 00H
Storage Register 32H
CRC Check High DDH
CRC Check Low D6H

during a communication error

When a error occurs during communication with the drive, the drive responds to the error
code, set the highest-order byte (bit7) of command data to 1 (Function code AND 80H) and
respond to the master system to inform master system about the error. And the drive keypad
displays CE-XX (XX is the error code) as the warning message.
Example:
ASCII Scheme: RTU Scheme:
STX ‘:’ Address 01H

241
 ‘0’ Function 86H
Address
‘1’ Exception code 02H
‘8’ CRC CHK Low C3H
Function
‘6’ CRC CHK High A1H
‘0’
Exception code
‘2’
‘7’
LRC CHK
‘7’
CR
END
LF

11.7 Modbus Data

The following tables shows all data including command, monitor and broadcast.

 Command Data (Read and write)

Register No. Definitions
2400H Retain
Operation Commands
Bit 0 Stop/Run (0:Stop, 1:Run)
Bit 1 Forward/Reverse (0:Forward, 1:Reverse)
Bit 2 External Fault EF0
Bit 3 Fault reset
Bit 4 Retain
Bit 5 Retain
Bit 6 Retain
2401H Bit 7 Retain
Bit 8 Multi-Function Terminal 1 (1: ON)
Bit 9 Multi-Function Terminal 2 (1: ON)
Bit 10 Multi-Function Terminal 3 (1: ON)
Bit 11 Multi-Function Terminal 4 (1: ON)
Bit 12 Multi-Function Terminal 5 (1: ON)
Bit 13 Multi-Function Terminal 6 (1: ON)
Bit 14 Multi-Function Terminal 7 (1: ON)
Bit 15 Multi-Function Terminal 8 (1: ON)
Frequency Command (0.01Hz Units)
2402H

2403H Torque Command (-16384 to 16384 equal -200% to 200% of motor rated
242
Register No. Definitions
torque)

 Monitor Data (Read Only)

Register No. Definitions
2420H Retain
Opeartion Status
Bit 0 1: During Run
Bit 1 1: During reverese
Bit 2 1: During Zero Speed Holding
Bit 3 1: During fault
Bit 4 1: During alarm detecton
2421H Bit 5 1: During speed agree
Bit 6 1: During ready
Bit 7 1: Frequency command provided from？
Bit 8 1: Run command provided from Remote
Bit 9 1: Torque mode
Bit 10 1: Zero Speed Holding
Bit 11 to 15 Retain
Frequency command (0.01Hz
2422H
units)
2423H Output frequency (0.01Hz units)
2424H Output current (0.1A units)
2425H Output voltage (0.1V units)
2426H DC voltage (0.1V units)
2427H Alarm description
2428H Fault description
Multi-Function Inputs and Outputs Status
Bit 0 1: Multi-Function Terminal 1 ON
Bit 1 1: Multi-Function Terminal 2 ON
Bit 2 1: Multi-Function Terminal 3 ON
2429H Bit 3 1: Multi-Function Terminal 4 ON
Bit 4 1: Multi-Function Terminal 5 ON
Bit 5 1: Multi-Function Terminal 6 ON
Bit 6 1: Multi-Function Terminal 7 ON
Bit 7 1: Multi-Function Terminal 8 ON

243
 Bit 8 to 10 Retain
Bit 12 1: Relay 1 ON
Bit 13 1: Relay 2 ON
Bit 14 1: PH1 ON
Bit 15 Retain
242AH AI1 input (0 equals 0V or 0mA, 1000 equals 10V or 20mA)
242BH AI2 input (0 equals 0V or 4mA, 1000 equals 10V or 20mA)
242CH Retain
242DH AO1 input (-1000 equals -10V, 0 equals 0V or 4mA, 1000 equals 10V or 20mA)
242EH AO2 input (-1000 equals -10V, 0 equals 0V or 4mA, 1000 equals 10V or 20mA)

 Alarm Data (2427H)

No. Contents No. Contents No. Contents

ot2 (Overtorque Detection

0 No alarm 8 EF6 (External Fault 6) 16
2)

1 dEv (Speed Deviation) 9 EF7 External Fault 7) 17 Ov (Overvoltage)

EF0 (Option Card External

2 10 EF8 (External Fault 8) 18 Uv(Undervoltage)
Fault)
Ut1 (Undertorque
3 EF1 (External Fault 1) 11 FbH (PID Feedback High) 19
Detection 1)
Ut2 (Undertorque
4 EF2 (External Fault 2) 12 FbL (PID Feedback Low) 20
Detection 2)
UL (Mechanical
5 EF3 (External Fault 3) 13 oH (Heatsink Overheat) 21 Weakening Undertorque
Detection)

6 EF4 (External Fault 4) 14 oH1 (Motor Overheat)

ot1 (Overtorque Detection

7 EF5 (External Fault 5) 15
1)

 Fault Data (2428H)

No. Contents No. Contents No. Contents

0 No fault 26 Retain 52 dv3 (Inversion Detection)

244
 dv4 (Inversion Prevention
1 GF (Ground Fault) 27 Retain 53
Detection)
oVA (Acceleration
2 28 Retain 54 FbH (PID Feedback High)
Overvoltage)
oVd (Deceleration
3 29 Retain 55 FbL (PID Feedback Low)
Overvoltage)
oVC (Constant Speed bUS (Option
4 30 Retain 56
Overvoltage) Communication Error)
oCA (Acceleration CE (Modbus
5 31 Retain 57
Overcurrent) Communication Error)
oCd (Deceleration
6 32 Retain 58 CF (Control Fault)
Overcurrent)
oCC (Constant Speed
7 33 oH (Heatsink Overheat) 59 Err (EEPROM Write Error)
Overcurrent)

8 EF 故障裡找不到 34 oH1 (Motor Overheat) 60 oS (Overspeed)

oL (Mechanical
SC (IGBT Fault or Output
9 35 Weakening Overtorque 61 PGo (PG Open)
Short Circuit)
Detection)

10 Retain 36 oL1 (Motor Overload) 62 Retain

11 Retain 37 oL2 (Drive Overload) 63 SEr

12 Retain 38 OL3 64 STo (Oscillation Detection)

ot1 (Overtorque Detection

13 Retain 39 65 CPF01
1)
ot2 (Overtorque Detection
14 Retain 40 66 CPF02
2)
Ut1 (Undertorque
15 Retain 41 67 CPF03
Detection 1)
Ut2 (Undertorque
16 Retain 42 68 CPF04
Detection 2)
UL (Mechanical
EF0 (Option Card External
17 43 Weakening Undertorque 69 CPF05
Fault)
Detection)
Uv1(Undervoltage
18 EF1 (External Fault 1) 44 70 CPF06
Detection 1)

245
 Uv2 (Control Power
19 EF2 (External Fault 2) 45 71 CPF07
Supply Voltage Fault)

20 EF3 (External Fault 3) 46 PF (Input Phase Loss) 72 Retain

21 EF4 (External Fault 4) 47 LF1(Output Phase Loss) 73 Retain

22 EF5 (External Fault 5) 48 Retain 74 Retain

23 EF6 (External Fault 6) 49 dEv (Speed Deviation) 75 Retain

24 EF7 (External Fault 7) 50 dv1 (Z Pulse Fault) 76 Retain

25 EF8 (External Fault 8) 51 dv2 (Z Pulse Noise Fault 77 Retain

MODBUS code corresponding invertor parameters

parameter code parameter code parameter code
A1-00 0x0000 A2-00 0x0080 A2-17 0x0091
A1-01 0x0001 A2-01 0x0081 A2-18 0x0092
A1-02 0x0002 A2-02 0x0082 A2-19 0x0093
A1-03 0x0003 A2-03 0x0083 A2-20 0x0094
A1-04 0x0004 A2-04 0x0084 A2-21 0x0095
A1-05 0x0005 A2-05 0x0085 A2-22 0x0096
A1-06 0x0006 A2-06 0x0086 A2-23 0x0097
A2-07 0x0087 A2-24 0x0098
A2-08 0x0088 A2-25 0x0099
A2-09 0x0089 A2-26 0x009A
A2-10 0x008A A2-27 0x009B
A2-11 0x008B A2-28 0x009C
A2-12 0x008C A2-29 0x009D
A2-13 0x008D A2-30 0x009E
A2-14 0x008E A2-31 0x009F
A2-15 0x008F A2-32 0x00A0
A2-16 0x0090

246
parameter code parameter code parameter code
B1-00 0x0100 B2-00 0x0180 B3-00 0x0200
B1-01 0x0101 B2-01 0x0181 B3-01 0x0201
B1-02 0x0102 B2-02 0x0182 B3-02 0x0202
B1-03 0x0103 B2-03 0x0183 B3-03 0x0203
B1-04 0x0104 B2-04 0x0184
B1-05 0x0105 B4-00 0x0280
B1-06 0x0106 B4-01 0x0281
B1-07 0x0107
B1-08 0x0108
B1-09 0x0109
B1-10 0x010A
B1-11 0x010B
B1-12 0x010C

parameter code parameter code parameter code

B5-00 0x0300 B5-21 0x0315 B6-00 0x0380
B5-01 0x0301 B5-22 0x0316 B6-01 0x0381
B5-02 0x0302 B5-23 0x0317 B6-02 0x0382
B5-03 0x0303 B5-24 0x0318 B6-03 0x0383
B5-04 0x0304
B5-05 0x0305
B5-06 0x0306
B5-07 0x0307
B5-08 0x0308
B5-09 0x0309
B5-10 0x030A
B5-11 0x030B
B5-12 0x030C
B5-13 0x030D
B5-14 0x030E
B5-15 0x030F
B5-16 0x0310
B5-17 0x0311
B5-18 0x0312
B5-19 0x0313
B5-20 0x0314

247
parameter code parameter code parameter code
B7-00 0x0400 B8-00 0x0480 B9-00 0x0500
B7-01 0x0401 B8-01 0x0481 B9-01 0x0501
B7-02 0x0402 B8-02 0x0482 B9-02 0x0502
B8-03 0x0483 B9-03 0x0503
B8-04 0x0484 B9-04 0x0504
B8-05 0x0485
B8-06 0x0486
B8-07 0x0487

parameter code parameter code parameter code

C1-00 0x0580 C2-00 0x0600 C3-00 0x0680
C1-01 0x0581 C2-01 0x0601 C3-01 0x0681
C1-02 0x0582 C2-02 0x0602 C3-02 0x0682
C1-03 0x0583 C2-03 0x0603 C3-03 0x0683
C1-04 0x0584 C3-04 0x0684
C1-05 0x0585 C3-05 0x0685
C1-06 0x0586 C3-06 0x0686
C1-07 0x0587
C1-08 0x0588
C1-09 0x0589
C1-10 0x058A
C1-11 0x058B
C1-12 0x058C

248
parameter code parameter code parameter code
C4-00 0x0700 C5-00 0x0780 C6-00 0x0800
C4-01 0x0701 C5-01 0x0781 C6-01 0x0801
C4-02 0x0702 C5-02 0x0782 C6-02 0x0802
C4-03 0x0703 C5-03 0x0783 C6-03 0x0803
C4-04 0x0704 C5-04 0x0784
C4-05 0x0705 C5-05 0x0785
C4-06 0x0706 C5-06 0x0786
C4-07 0x0707 C5-07 0x0787
C4-08 0x0708 C5-08 0x0788
C4-09 0x0709 C5-09 0x0789
C4-10 0x070A C5-10 0x078A
C4-11 0x070B
C4-12 0x070C
C4-13 0x070D
C4-14 0x070E
C4-15 0x070F
C4-16 0x0710
C4-17 0x0711
C4-18 0x0712
C4-19 0x0713
C4-20 0x0714
C4-21 0x0715

parameter code parameter code parameter code

L1-00 0x0880 L1-12 0x088C L2-00 0x0900
L1-01 0x0881 L1-13 0x088D L2-01 0x0901
L1-02 0x0882 L1-14 0x088E
L1-03 0x0883 L1-15 0x088F L3-00 0x0980
L1-04 0x0884 L1-16 0x0890 L3-01 0x0981
L1-05 0x0885 L3-02 0x0982
L1-06 0x0886 L3-03 0x0983
L1-07 0x0887
L1-08 0x0888
L1-09 0x0889
L1-10 0x088A
L1-11 0x088B

249
parameter code parameter code parameter code
L4-00 0x0A00 L5-00 0x0A80 L6-00 0x0B00
L4-01 0x0A01 L5-01 0x0A81 L6-01 0x0B01
L4-02 0x0A02 L5-02 0x0A82 L6-02 0x0B02
L4-03 0x0A03 L5-03 0x0A83
L4-04 0x0A04 L5-04 0x0A84
L5-05 0x0A85
L5-06 0x0A86

parameter code parameter code parameter code

D1-00 0x0B80 D2-00 0x0C00 D3-00 0x0C80
D1-01 0x0B81 D2-01 0x0C01 D3-01 0x0C81
D1-02 0x0B82 D2-02 0x0C02 D3-02 0x0C82
D1-03 0x0B83 D2-03 0x0C03 D3-03 0x0C83
D1-04 0x0B84 D2-04 0x0C04 D3-04 0x0C84
D1-05 0x0B85 D2-05 0x0C05 D3-05 0x0C85
D1-06 0x0B86 D2-06 0x0C06 D3-06 0x0C86
D1-07 0x0B87 D2-07 0x0C07 D3-07 0x0C87
D1-08 0x0B88 D2-10 0x0C0A D3-08 0x0C88
D1-09 0x0B89 D2-11 0x0C0B D3-09 0x0C89
D1-10 0x0B8A D2-12 0x0C0C D3-10 0x0C8A
D1-11 0x0B8B D2-13 0x0C0D D3-11 0x0C8B
D1-12 0x0B8C D2-14 0x0C0E D3-12 0x0C8C
D1-13 0x0B8D D2-15 0x0C0F
D1-14 0x0B8E D2-16 0x0C10
D1-15 0x0B8F D2-17 0x0C11
D1-16 0x0B90 D2-18 0x0C12
D1-17 0x0B91 D2-21 0x0C15
D1-18 0x0B92
D1-19 0x0B93
D1-20 0x0B94
D1-21 0x0B95
D1-22 0x0B96

250
parameter code parameter code parameter code
E1-00 0x0D00 E2-00 0x0D80 E3-00 0x0E00
E1-01 0x0D01 E2-01 0x0D81 E3-01 0x0E01
E1-02 0x0D02 E2-02 0x0D82 E3-02 0x0E02
E1-03 0x0D03 E2-03 0x0D83 E3-03 0x0E03
E1-04 0x0D04 E2-05 0x0D85 E3-05 0x0E05
E1-05 0x0D05 E2-06 0x0D86 E3-06 0x0E06
E1-06 0x0D06 E2-07 0x0D87 E3-07 0x0E07
E1-07 0x0D07 E2-08 0x0D88 E3-08 0x0E08
E2-09 0x0D89 E3-09 0x0E09
E3-10 0x0E0A
E3-11 0x0E0B
E3-12 0x0E0C

parameter code parameter code parameter code

E4-00 0x0E80 E5-00 0x0F00 E6-00 0x0F80
E4-01 0x0E81 E5-01 0x0F01 E6-01 0x0F81
E4-02 0x0E82 E5-02 0x0F02 E6-02 0x0F82
E4-03 0x0E83 E5-03 0x0F03 E6-03 0x0F83
E4-04 0x0E84 E5-04 0x0F04 E6-04 0x0F84
E4-05 0x0E85 E5-05 0x0F05 E6-05 0x0F85
E4-06 0x0E86 E5-06 0x0F06 E6-06 0x0F86
E4-07 0x0E87 E5-07 0x0F07 E6-07 0x0F87
E5-08 0x0F08 E6-08 0x0F88
E5-09 0x0F09 E6-09 0x0F89
E5-10 0x0F0A E6-10 0x0F8A
E6-11 0x0F8B

251
parameter code parameter code parameter code
P1-00 0x1000 P2-00 0x1080 P3-00 0x1100
P1-01 0x1001 P2-01 0x1081 P3-01 0x1101
P1-03 0x1003 P2-03 0x1083 P3-02 0x1102
P1-04 0x1004 P2-04 0x1084 P3-03 0x1103
P1-05 0x1005 P2-05 0x1085 P3-04 0x1104
P2-06 0x1086 P3-05 0x1105
P2-07 0x1087 P3-06 0x1106
P2-08 0x1088 P3-07 0x1107
P2-09 0x1089 P3-08 0x1108
P2-10 0x108A P3-09 0x1109
P2-11 0x108B P3-10 0x110A
P3-11 0x110B
P3-12 0x110C
P3-13 0x110D
P3-14 0x110E
P3-15 0x110F

parameter code parameter code parameter code

P4-00 0x1180 P5-00 0x1200 P6-00 0x1280
P4-01 0x1181 P5-01 0x1201 P6-01 0x1281
P4-02 0x1182 P5-02 0x1202 P6-02 0x1282
P4-03 0x1183 P6-03 0x1283
P4-04 0x1184 P6-04 0x1284
P4-05 0x1185 P6-05 0x1285
P4-06 0x1186 P6-06 0x1286
P6-07 0x1287
P6-08 0x1288
P6-09 0x1289
P6-10 0x128A
P6-11 0x128B
P6-12 0x128C
P6-13 0x128D
P6-14 0x128E
P6-15 0x128F

252
parameter code parameter code parameter code
P7-00 0x1300 N1-00 0x1380 N2-00 0x1400
P7-01 0x1301 N1-01 0x1381 N2-01 0x1401
P7-02 0x1302 N1-02 0x1382 N2-02 0x1402
P7-03 0x1303 N1-03 0x1383
P7-04 0x1304
P7-05 0x1305
P7-06 0x1306
P7-07 0x1307
P7-09 0x1309
P7-10 0x130A
P7-11 0x130B
P7-12 0x130C
P7-13 0x130D
P7-14 0x130E

parameter code parameter code parameter code

N3-00 0x1480 N4-00 0x1500 N6-00 0x1600
N3-01 0x1481 N4-02 0x1502 N6-01 0x1601
N3-02 0x1482 N4-03 0x1503 N6-02 0x1602
N3-03 0x1483 N5-00 0x1580 N6-03 0x1603
N3-04 0x1484 N5-01 0x1581 N6-04 0x1604
N3-05 0x1485 N6-07 0x1607
N3-06 0x1486 N6-09 0x1609
N3-07 0x1487 N6-10 0x160A
N6-11 0x160B
N6-12 0x160C

253
parameter code parameter code parameter code
O1-00 0x1680 O2-00 0x1700 O3-00 0x1780
O1-01 0x1681 O2-01 0x1701 O3-01 0x1781
O1-02 0x1682 O2-03 0x1703 O4-00 0x1800
O1-03 0x1683 O2-04 0x1704 O4-01 0x1801
O2-05 0x1705 O4-02 0x1802
O2-06 0x1706 O4-06 0x1806
O4-07 0x1807

parameter code parameter code parameter code

T1-00 0x1880 T2-00 0x1900 T3-00 0x1980
T1-01 0x1881 T2-02 0x1902 T3-01 0x1981
T1-02 0x1882 T2-03 0x1903 T3-02 0x1982
T1-03 0x1883 T2-04 0x1904 T3-03 0x1983
T1-04 0x1884 T2-05 0x1905
T1-05 0x1885 T2-06 0x1906
T1-06 0x1886 T2-07 0x1907
T1-07 0x1887 T2-08 0x1908
T1-08 0x1888 T2-09 0x1909
T1-09 0x1889 T2-10 0x190A
T1-12 0x188C T2-11 0x190B
T2-12 0x190C
T2-13 0x190D
T2-14 0x190E
T2-15 0x190F
T2-16 0x1910
T2-17 0x1911

254
parameter code parameter code parameter code
F1-00 0x1A00 U1-00 0x1D00 U2-00 0x1D80
F1-01 0x1A01 U1-01 0x1D01 U2-01 0x1D81
F1-02 0x1A02 U1-02 0x1D02 U2-02 0x1D82
F1-03 0x1A03 U1-03 0x1D03 U2-03 0x1D83
F1-04 0x1A04 U1-04 0x1D04 U2-04 0x1D84
F1-05 0x1A05 U1-05 0x1D05 U2-05 0x1D85
F1-06 0x1A06 U1-06 0x1D06 U2-06 0x1D86
F1-07 0x1A07 U1-07 0x1D07 U2-07 0x1D87
F1-08 0x1A08 U1-08 0x1D08 U2-08 0x1D88
F1-09 0x1A09 U1-09 0x1D09 U2-09 0x1D89
F1-10 0x1A0A U1-10 0x1D0A U2-10 0x1D8A
F1-11 0x1A0B U1-11 0x1D0B U2-11 0x1D8B
F1-12 0x1A0C U1-12 0x1D0C U2-12 0x1D8C
F1-13 0x1A0D U1-13 0x1D0D U2-13 0x1D8D
F1-14 0x1A0E U1-14 0x1D0E U2-14 0x1D8E
F1-15 0x1A0F U1-15 0x1D0F U2-15 0x1D8F
F1-16 0x1A10 U1-16 0x1D10 U2-16 0x1D90
F1-17 0x1A11 U1-17 0x1D11 U2-17 0x1D91
F1-18 0x1A12 U1-18 0x1D12 U2-19 0x1D93
U2-20 0x1D94
U2-21 0x1D95
U2-22 0x1D96
U2-23 0x1D97
U2-24 0x1D98
U2-25 0x1D99
U2-26 0x1D9A
U2-27 0x1D9B
U2-28 0x1D9C
U2-29 0x1D9D
U2-30 0x1D9E
U2-31 0x1D9F
U2-33 0x1DA1
U2-34 0x1DA2
U2-35 0x1DA3
U2-36 0x1DA4
U2-37 0x1DA5

255
parameter code parameter code parameter code
U3-00 0x1E00 U4-00 0x1E80 U5-00 0x1F00
U3-01 0x1E01 U4-01 0x1E81 U5-01 0x1F01
U3-06 0x1E06 U4-02 0x1E82 U5-02 0x1F02
U3-07 0x1E07 U4-03 0x1E83 U5-03 0x1F03
U3-08 0x1E08 U4-04 0x1E84 U5-04 0x1F04
U3-09 0x1E09 U4-05 0x1E85 U5-05 0x1F05
U3-10 0x1E0A U4-06 0x1E86 U5-06 0x1F06
U3-11 0x1E0B U4-08 0x1E88 U5-07 0x1F07
U3-12 0x1E0C U5-08 0x1F08
U3-13 0x1E0D U5-09 0x1F09
U3-14 0x1E0E U5-10 0x1F0A
U3-15 0x1E0F U5-11 0x1F0B
U3-17 0x1E11 U5-14 0x1F0E
U3-18 0x1E12 U5-15 0x1F0F
U5-16 0x1F10
U5-17 0x1F11
U5-18 0x1F12
U5-19 0x1F13

11.8 Communication Errors

11.8.1 Modbus Errors

The Modbus error codes are listed in the following table.
When an error occurs, remove the cause of the fault and restart communications. Each error
code may have different definitions depending on the function code.

Error Code Function Code Description

1 3,6,8,10 Function code error
3 Read data is outside the setting range
2 6 Write data is outside the setting range
10 Write data is outside the setting range
3 Read data exceeds 125 pieces
6 Write data is outside the setting range
3 8 Read request value error including CRC check error
Write data exceeds 123 pieces or byte count does not match
10
the amount of write data.

256
 3 Read register error
6 Write register error
4
8 Response pocket error
10 Write register error

11.8.2 Slave Response

In the following situations, the slave will ignore the command message sent from the master
and not respond to it.
 When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC) is detected in the
command message.
 The slave address in the command message do not match the slave address in the drive
(Set the slave address for the drive using E6-06 in advance).
 The gap between two blocks of a message is greater than 24 bits.
 The command message length is incorrect.
Note: When the slave address in the command message is 00H, all slaves perform the write function, but do not
send any response message to the master.

257
11.9 Modbus Communication Example
MODBUS communication with Siemens S7-200 example as follows：

※ Slave is set to 1，E6-06 = 1。

※ Addr set to 49250, corresponding to the invertor position is 2421H, 2421H representatives began to
read data from the location
※ Coun`t set to 11, read 11 data continuously
※ VB as Byte, so a data occupies two VB。
※ 2422H (frequency command)，13 * 256 + 172 = 3500。
※ 2423H (frequency output)，13 * 256 + 172 = 3500。
※ 2424H (current output)，0 * 256 + 1 = 1。
※ 2425H (voltage output)，10 * 256 + 26 = 2586。
※ 2426H (DC)，23 * 256 + 192 = 6080。
※ 2427H (Warning Description)，0 * 256 + 0 = 0。
※ 2428H (Fault description)，0 * 256 + 0 = 0。
※ 2429H (Input and output status)，0 * 256 + 0 = 0。
※ 242AH (AI1 input)，0 * 256 + 0 = 0。
※ 242BH (AI2 input)，0 * 256 + 0 = 0。
※ The above values for the panel display, the decimal point does not count the units,

258
 according to actual user unit conversion。

MODBUS with Mitsubishi FX-3G communication example as follows：

※ Input patameter of the communication。

※ Read 11 data starting H2421。

259
Above panel display value, excluding the decimal point units, please according to actual
user unit conversion

260
 Copyright 2014 LITEON Industrial Automation. All Rights Reserved

Lite-On Group Headquarters

22F, 392, Ruey Kuang Road, Neihu, Taipei City 114, Taiwan

Lite-On IA Headquarters
11F, 866-1, Chung-Zheng Rd., Chung Ho District, New Taipei City 235, Taiwan
Factory
7, Lane 3, San-Ho Rd., San-Shi Village, Dayuan Town, Taoyuan County 337, Taiwan
261

Email: [email protected]